Contents

Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual PDF

1 of 310
1 of 310

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual PDF

iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING

Instruction Manual

- AP20-CNV002AA-MA - AP20-CNV002AA-MB - AP20-CNV002AA-MC - AP20-CNV002AA-MD - AP20-CNV002AA-ME - AP20-CNV002AA-ML

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. Refer to the user's manual of the CPU module to use for a description of the PLC system safety precautions. In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious consequences. Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety. Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

[Design Precautions]

WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system

operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, and

protective interlock circuit for forward/reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning. (2) The programmable controller stops its operation upon detection of the following status, and the

output status of the system will be as shown below. Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated. Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self-diagnostic function of the CPU

module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error. (3) Also, all outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where

the CPU module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to the user's manual of the CPU module to use.

(4) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.

In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.

Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to manuals relevant to the network. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the CPU module to each module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system. For the "system area", "write-protect area", and the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for the module used.

If a communication cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures. To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet, take measures such as installing a firewall.

Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Machine home position return is controlled by two kinds of data: a home position return direction

and a home position return speed. Deceleration starts when the near-point dog signal turns on. If an incorrect home position return direction is set, motion control may continue without deceleration. To prevent machine damage caused by this, configure an interlock circuit external to the programmable controller.

(2) When the module detects an error, the motion slows down and stops or the motion suddenly stops, depending on the stop group setting in parameter. Set the parameter to meet the specifications of a positioning control system. In addition, set the home position return parameter and positioning data within the specified setting range.

(3) Outputs may remain on or off, or become undefined due to a failure of a component such as an insulation element and transistor in an output circuit, where the module cannot detect any error. In a system that the incorrect output could cause a serious accident, configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals.

If safety standards (ex., robot safety rules, etc.,) apply to the system using the module, servo amplifier and servomotor, make sure that the safety standards are satisfied.

Construct a safety circuit externally of the module or servo amplifier if the abnormal operation of the module or servo amplifier differs from the safety directive operation in the system.

Do not remove the SSCNET cable while turning on the control circuit power supply of Multiple CPU system and servo amplifier. Do not see directly the light generated from SSCNET connector of the module or servo amplifier and the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eyes, you may feel something wrong with eyes. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JISC6802 or IEC60825-1.)

WARNING

[Design Precautions]

[Installation Precautions]

CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power

cables. Keep a distance of 100 mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

During control of an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve, a large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on. Therefore, use a module that has a sufficient current rating.

After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.

Do not power off the programmable controller or do not reset the CPU module during the setting registration. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined. The data need to be set in the buffer memory and to be written to the flash ROM again. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

Reset the CPU module after changing the parameters. Failure to do so may cause malfunction because the previous parameter settings remain in the module.

When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices (such as remote RUN/ STOP), select "Do Not Open by Program" for "Opening Method" in the module parameters. If "Open by Program" is selected, an execution of remote STOP causes the communication line to close. Consequently, the CPU module cannot reopen the communication line, and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN.

WARNING Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the

module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.

3

4

[Installation Precautions]

[Wiring Precautions]

CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the

manual "Safety Guidelines" included in the base unit. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.

To mount a module, place the concave part(s) located at the bottom onto the guide(s) of the base unit, and push in the module until the hook(s) located at the top snaps into place. Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.

When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a screw.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely. Check the connection for looseness. Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.

When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot. Check that it is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.

Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette into the cassette connector of a CPU module. After insertion, close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.

Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module, SD memory card, extended SRAM cassette, or connector. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

WARNING Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before installation and wiring.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product. After installation and wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for

operation. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

[Wiring Precautions]

CAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance

of 100 ohm or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction. Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade

solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure.

Check the rated voltage and signal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause fire or failure.

Connectors for external devices or coaxial cables must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections may cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

Securely connect the connector to the module. Poor contact may cause malfunction. Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power

cables. Keep a distance of 100 mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact. Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped.

Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable. Incorrect wiring (connecting the cable to an incorrect interface) may cause failure of the module and external device.

Tighten the terminal screws or connector screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part. For the cable with connector, hold the connector part of the cable. For the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the terminal screw. Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable.

Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, from entering the module during wiring. Do not remove the film during wiring. Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.

Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block. Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.

For Ethernet cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.

5

6

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or

throw the battery into the fire. Also, do not expose it to liquid or strong shock. Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode, ignite, or leak, resulting in injury or fire.

Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws, connector screws, or module fixing screws. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data

of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handyphone

System) more than 25 cm away in all directions from the programmable controller. Failure to do so may cause malfunction.

Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so can cause the module to fail or malfunction.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the terminal block to/from the module, and do not insert/remove the extended SRAM cassette to/from the CPU module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively. Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.

After the first use of the product, do not insert/remove the SD memory card to/from the CPU module more than 500 times. Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction.

Do not touch the metal terminals on the back side of the SD memory card. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure.

Do not touch the integrated circuits on the circuit board of an extended SRAM cassette. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure.

Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.

[Operating Precautions]

[Disposal Precautions]

Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it.

Before handling the module, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

Before testing the operation, set a low speed value for the speed limit parameter so that the operation can be stopped immediately upon occurrence of a hazardous condition.

Confirm and adjust the program and each parameter before operation. Unpredictable movements may occur depending on the machine.

When using the absolute position system function, on starting up, and when the module or absolute value motor has been replaced, always perform a home position return.

Before starting the operation, confirm the brake function. Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspection. After maintenance and inspections are completed, confirm that the position detection of the absolute

position detection function is correct. Lock the control panel and prevent access to those who are not certified to handle or install electric

equipment.

CAUTION When changing data and operating status, and modifying program of the running programmable

controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation. Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction, damage to the machines, or accidents.

Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer memory are being written to the flash ROM in the module. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined. The data need to be set in the buffer memory and to be written to the flash ROM again. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

Note that when the reference axis speed is specified for interpolation operation, the speed of the partner axis (2nd, 3rd, or 4th axis) may exceed the speed limit value.

Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching. Doing so may lead to injuries.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. For

details on battery regulations in EU member states, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.

CAUTION

7

8

[Transportation Precautions]

[Precautions on Introduction of User Programs]

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations. For details on the regulated

models, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual. The halogens (such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine), which are contained in a fumigant

used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials, may cause failure of the product. Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods (such as heat treatment) instead of fumigation. The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wood.

CAUTION To utilize the application program (example) and the screens (example) for an actual system,

sufficiently confirm that the program and the screens will not cause system control problems on user's own responsibility. Examine the positions where interlock conditions are required in a target system and add them.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any damages or problems which may occur as a result of using the application program and the screens.

The application program and screens provided by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may be changed without any notice.

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT

INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the "iQ Monozukuri" product. This manual describes the design, procedures before operation, functions, and programming required for constructing a system using this application. Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of this application to design the product correctly. To utilize the program introduced in this manual for an actual system, sufficiently confirm that the program will not cause system control problems.

(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the

public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality

assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator,

Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region.

9

10

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 19 1.1 Converting Application Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.2 Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.3 Converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Role of each part of a converting line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Relation among tension, torque, and winding diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Tension control methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

1.4 Product Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Products in the iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.5 Files in DVD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 1.6 Applicable Hardware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

CHAPTER 2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 30 2.1 Registering a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 2.2 Registering the FB Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2.3 Updating Library Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2.4 Certifying the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2.5 Converting Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 43 3.1 System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.2 Electronic Gear Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.3 Rotation Direction Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

CHAPTER 4 FB LIBRARY 47 4.1 Functions of the FB Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

List of FBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Version history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Restrictions and precautions common to all FBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Operation timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2 Details of the FB Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl (Tension sensor feedback velocity control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl (Dancer feedback velocity control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl (Tension sensor feedback torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl (Tension sensorless torque control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl (Tension sensorless velocity control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl (Tension sensor feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl (Dancer feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 CNV_DrawCtrl (Draw control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 CNV_LineVelocityGenerator (Line velocity generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 CNV_DiaCalcVelocity (Roll diameter calculation (Velocity ratio method)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

C O

N TE

N TS

CNV_DiaCalcThickness (Roll diameter calculation (web thickness integration method)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 CNV_DiaCalcFeed (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 CNV_WinderInertiaTorque (Inertia compensation torque calculation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 CNV_InertiaCalc (Load inertia ratio calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTorque (Inertia compensation torque calculation (Motor inertia ratio)). . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 CNV_InertiaEstimation (Inertia estimation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc (Inertia compensation torque calculation (Inertia estimation value)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 CNV_WinderFrictionTorque (Friction compensation torque calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Friction torque measurement). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement (Tension deviation measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 CNV_WinderGainChange (Gain change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 CNV_TaperTension (Taper tension calculation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CNV_PIDControl (PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CNV_EdgePositionCtrl (Edge position control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 CNV_WebBreakDetect (Web break detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement (Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc (Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 STD_Lowpass1 (Low-pass filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 STD_AverageValueFilter (Moving average filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 STD_Limiter (Limiter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 STD_TableInterpolation (Table interpolation (2000 points)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 STD_Table50Interpolation (Table interpolation (50 points)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 STD_RampGenerator (Ramp generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

CHAPTER 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 140 5.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.2 Operation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 5.3 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Control specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Program configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Program processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ExamplePrgCtrl FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Operation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5.4 Reel Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Control specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Program configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Program processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ExamplePrgReelChange FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Operation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

5.5 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Control specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Program configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Program processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 INVExample FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ExamplePrgCtrl FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Operation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

11

12

CHAPTER 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 215 6.1 Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Screen transition (All screens). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Screen transition (Common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6.2 Basic Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 6.3 Description of Common Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Descriptions of character colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Key window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 GOT system alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Window screens common in all screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

6.4 When the GOT is Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Start logo screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Operation to be performed when the GOT is started for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

6.5 Base Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Operation monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Unwinder setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Rewinder setting 1 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Rewinder setting 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Line operation setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Graph screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Reel change setting screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Reel change operating status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

6.6 Window Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 GOT system alarm reset window screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Cursor information window screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Pattern Select/Register window screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Save confirmation window screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Deletion confirmation window screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Result display window screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

CHAPTER 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 256 7.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 7.2 Control Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 7.3 Operation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 7.4 Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 7.5 Program Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 7.6 Program Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

ReadCamData (Cam data read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 7.8 Operation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

CHAPTER 8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 275 8.1 Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 8.2 Operation Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 8.3 Unwinder Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 8.4 Rewinder Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

C O

N TE

N TS

8.5 Operation Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

CHAPTER 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 280 9.1 Configuration and Execution Procedure of Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

System example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Starting and closing the simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Restrictions and precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

9.2 Simulator Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Parameter details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

APPENDICES 289 Appendix 1 List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

FB library: Warning (outside the input value range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 FB library: Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Application program control FB: Warning (outside the input value range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Application program control FB: Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Appendix 2 List of GOT Devices to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Appendix 3 Functional Restrictions by Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Appendix 4 Using MELSOFT iQ AppPortal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

INSTRUCTION INDEX 302

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

13

14

RELEVANT MANUALS RD77MS, RD77GF

RD78G(S)

This manual does not include information on restrictions of use such as combination with modules or PLC CPUs. Please make sure to read the user's manual of the corresponding products before using this application package.

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.

Manual name [manual number] Description Available form MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) [IB-0300245]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, wiring, and operation examples of the Simple Motion module

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Application) [IB-0300247]

Functions, input/output signals, buffer memory addresses, parameter settings, programming, and troubleshooting of the Simple Motion module

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Advanced Synchronous Control) [IB-0300249]

Functions and programming for the synchronous control of the Simple Motion module

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Network) [IB-0300307]

Functions, parameter settings, troubleshooting, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE Field Network

Print book

e-Manual PDF

Manual name [manual number] Description Available form MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) [IB-0300406ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, and wiring of the Motion module

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Network) [IB-0300426ENG]

Functions, parameter settings, troubleshooting, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE TSN

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Application for Simple Motion Mode) [IB-0300572ENG]

Functions, I/O signals, buffer memory, parameter settings, programming, and troubleshooting of the Simple Motion mode

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Advanced Synchronous Control for Simple Motion Mode) [IB-0300575ENG]

Functions and programming for the synchronous control of the Simple Motion mode

Print book

e-Manual PDF

TERMS Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Description Out-feed Indicates the section between a rewinding reel and a feed roll.

Out-feed roll Rolls installed in the out-feed section. Out-feed rolls are driven by clutches, brakes, and servo motors. The tension of a web material after being processed can be controlled with a high degree of accuracy.

Accumulator This mechanism accumulates web materials without stopping lines at the replacement of unwinding/rewinding rolls on the line that has been continuously operating.

Actuator A drive or control mechanism such as a clutch, brake, or motor installed on an unwinder axis or rewinder axis

Under-roll This term indicates the method of driving/braking the roll in contact with the reel without driving/braking the unwinder/ rewinder axis. This roll is the one installed under the reel.

In-feed Indicates the section between an unwinding reel and a feed roll.

In-feed roll Rolls installed in the in-feed section. In-feed rolls are driven by clutches, brakes, and servo motors. The tension of a web material at the upstream of the processing can be controlled with a high degree of accuracy.

Weight dancer This dancer applies a load to the dancer roll to give a tension to a material.

Air clutch Air brake

A clutch/brake that transmits a torque by crimping the friction plate with air

Feed roll A driving roll for feeding a web material Feed rolls need to be designed not to generate a slip between the roll and a material. Feed roll is also called nip roll or pinch roll.

Automatic pastor This mechanism automatically replaces and pastes an old roll with a new roll without stopping the line at the replacement of unwinding/rewinding rolls on the line that has been continuously operating. This mechanism is also called automatic reel changer or automatic splicer.

Open-loop control This control regulates the reel torque with winding diameter detection to maintain the tension constantly.

Broken line taper The taper tension control that does not use a single taper ratio from the initial diameter to the final diameter but changes the taper ratio with the intermediate winding diameter

Guide roll This roll is used for changing the direction and preventing a material from swinging when the material is fed. Guide roll is also called follower roll because the roll is not driven by a motor but rotated by a material traveling.

Tension during acceleration The tension caused by the inertia of a web material or roll at the startup of the machine. The tension at the unwinder side increases and the tension at the rewinder side decreases.

Inertia compensation control Because of the inertia of the reel, the tension at the unwinder side increases and the tension at the rewinder side decreases at the startup of the machine. The tension at the unwinder side decreases and the tension at the rewinder side increases when the machine decelerates. To reduce the fluctuation of the tension, this control increases or decreases the braking torque or rewinding torque when the machine is started or stopped.

Geared motor The motor that is integrated with a speed reducer. If the reduction ratio of a servo motor with a speed reducer is too large, the servo motor is not suitable for torque control.

Old axis sudden stop To suddenly stop the reel at the side where unwinding is completed in the automatic reel changing/unwinding mechanism. Some control equipment has a fixed power supply with a short-time rating inside.

Proximity switch A non-contact switch that operates when an object to be detected comes close to the switch. This switch is sometimes used as a rotation signal for a reel or feed roll.

Closed-loop control This control automatically regulates outputs depending on the difference of a target value and detected value.

Deceleration gain The control ratio to reduce the tension fluctuation caused by the inertia of the reel during deceleration of the machine

Tension during deceleration The tension caused by the inertia of the reel during deceleration of the machine. The tension at the unwinder side decreases and the tension at the rewinder side increases.

Corner diameter The winding diameter that becomes a corner point where the taper ratio changes in the broken line taper.

Converting To process a web material. The machine for this purpose is called converting machine.

Converting simulator A function to simulate the operation of the tension control on a personal computer.

Differential transformer This transformer detects the tension by measuring the displacement of a spring dancer or detects the winding diameter by measuring the movement of a touch lever. A movable iron core has been installed between the primary coil and the secondary coil so that a voltage of the secondary coil depending on the iron core position can be acquired.

Temporary license A license for using the application before getting an official license. The temporary license is available for two months (from the registration date of the temporary license to the same day in the month after next).

15

16

Follower roll A roll that is not driven by a motor

Elevator roll A follower roll in the accumulator. Users can accumulate or pick up a material by lifting up and down the spindles of multiple elevator rolls.

New axis preset To set the initial value of the torque required for a new axis just after being switched in the automatic reel change control

Simple Motion module A Simple Motion module and a Motion module that operates in the Simple Motion mode

Stop roll The roll that has been installed at the opening of the accumulator at the unwinder side or the opening of the accumulator at the rewinder side to keep a material during the replacement of the reel

Stall torque A constant torque that is to be given while the machine is working or after the machine has stopped

Spring dancer To give a tension to a material by the expansion and contraction of the spring installed in the dancer roll

Sliding tension To prevent a sudden change of the tension by gradually decreasing the actual command value even when a set value suddenly decreases. Such a gradual decrease can be adjusted.

Braking torque The brake torque to be applied to the unwinder reel. Dividing this value by the unwinder radius determines the unwinder tension value.

Cumulative thickness calculation method

To detect the winding diameter with the product of the set material thickness and the rotation amount of the reel

Integral time When the tension deviation is small and this value is kept for a while, control outputs are changed to decrease the tension deviation. Integral time indicates the integration time constant at that time.

Positive unwinding To drive an unwinding reel for the initial paper feed operation or to drive an unwinding reel with a motor when the preparatory reel (new axis) is accelerated in the automatic reel change operation to adjust the peripheral speed.

Turning arm A winding reel support for changing the positions of multiple unwinding reels or rewinding reels and switching the current axis with a new axis. This is also called turret arm.

Sensor A tension detector, proximity switch, or pulse generator in the tension control

Turret This mechanism rotates to change the unwinder axis/rewinder axis. The fixing mechanisms (lock pin, latch, and brake for fixing) are equipped.

Bamboo shape This shape indicates the conditions in which the end surface of a rewound material is irregular and a winding core is protruded. The taper tension control is performed to prevent the conditions.

Multi-axis proportioning control To proportion control outputs of each axis based on the signal of one control equipment in a simultaneous multi-axis rewinding/unwinding mechanism

Touching lever This lever detects a travel angle of the roll in contact with the reel using the movement of the lever and acquires signals proportional to the winding diameter. A differential transformer or potentiometer detects the movement of the lever.

Touch roll This mechanism contacts the adhesion tape and workpieces at the workpiece change.

Dancer roll A follower roll that moves its axis upward and downward or rightward and leftward. In the dancer roll system, the tension of a material is determined depending on the load applied to a roll axis.

Straight line taper To control a machine using a constant tension taper ratio from an initial diameter to the last diameter in the taper tension control. (To control without changing the taper ratio)

Constant tension control This control performs rewinding/unwinding with a constant tension regardless of winding diameter changes.

Constant torque control This control performs rewinding/unwinding with a constant torque regardless of winding diameter changes. This control is one of the taper tension controls.

Taper tension To gradually decrease the tension as the reel diameter becomes larger in rewinding.

Taper tension ratio Gradual decrease ratio of the tension. (Minimum diameter tension - Maximum diameter tension)/Minimum diameter tension

Electro-pneumatic converter This device is used for controlling air clutches and air brakes to gain the air pressure proportional to an input electric signal.

Tension meter This device amplifies a faint signal from a tension detector to acquire a tension signal output and displays its value.

Transmitted torque Torque transmitted from the input axis of a clutch to an output axis. When the clutch has slipped, this torque is equal to the control torque of the clutch.

Torque tension control To control the tension of a material by adjusting the rotation torque of a roll. The tension control is based on the torque control.

Draw control Multiple feed rolls are installed to fasten the peripheral speed of the latter part a bit and to operate a machine in a certain increase rate (draw ratio).

Nip roll Refer to "Feed roll".

Powder clutch Powder brake

Electromagnetic clutch/brake that transmits the torque by filling fine iron powder between an input rotating body and output rotating body (or stationary body) and giving magnetism to the powder

Back tension The tension to remove slacks of materials or the tension applied to the opposite side of the feeding direction

Pulse generator A pulse generator is used for detecting the rotation speed of the feed roll with the winding diameter detector in the ratio calculation method. The generator is also called rotary encoder.

Term Description

Hunting Hunting phenomenon in the feedback control

Hysteresis clutch Hysteresis brake

A non-contact electromagnetic clutch/brake that uses the hysteresis characteristics of a non-magnetized permanent magnet

Winding diameter detection in the ratio calculation method

In this calculation method, the rotation speed of the feed roll is divided by the rotation speed of the winding reel to calculate the winding diameter.

Proportionality gain The ratio of the direct response of control outputs to the control deviation

Pillow block A support board of the bearing for supporting a roll for tension detection. The height from the installation face to the support core is called center height.

Pinch roll Refer to "Feed roll".

Feedback To input a tension detection value into the control system in the closed loop control for tension detection.

Deadband The deviation band for stabilizing the tension. In the closed loop control that controls outputs depending on the deviation of a target value and a detected value, the corrective control is not performed when a deviation is small.

Pre-drive The preparatory operation to adjust the peripheral speed of the preparatory reel to the line speed in the automatic reel change machine

Brake torque Refer to "Braking torque".

Press roll This roll is for crimping the web material on the winding reel with the web material of the under-roll in the circumferential surface drive (braking) rewinding (unwinding) machine.

Bellofram type air cylinder A bellows type air cylinder is for improving responsiveness and reducing friction resistance in the method in which a load is applied to the dancer roll using an air cylinder.

Flat roll To rewind materials in a flat shape (not round circle). Flat winding is used for rewinding of lithium batteries or others.

Potentiometer This device detects a rotation angle by applying a constant voltage between fixed terminals of a variable resistor and measuring the voltage of a slide terminal.

Mechanical loss compensation To prevent rolling resistance from affecting the control tension when the winding reel has the rolling resistance.

Reel change The operation to change the roll of the unwinder/rewinder axis.

Rotary encoder Refer to "Pulse generator".

FB The abbreviation for a function block

GOT The abbreviation for Graphic Operation Terminal

Term Description

17

18

REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY To use the application, register a license key to the CPU module. Before starting up the system, follow the "License Key Request Instructions" supplied with this product to get a license key.

1. The following information is required to request a license key. Application information (product name, model, and product ID) This information is described in the "License Certificate" supplied with this product. Hardware information (model and serial number) The model and serial number (manufacturing information for MELSEC iQ-R series) of the CPU module to be used. For how to check the manufacturing information and firmware version, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

2. Register the license key to the CPU module before creating an application program. For the registration procedure, refer to the following. Page 30 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

3. Attach the supplied "iQ Monozukuri seal" on the CPU module for which a license key has been registered. For the position to attach the seal, refer to the following.

Position where the seal is attached: Above the PULL on the LED cover

Position where the seal is attached: Below the Ethernet port P2

1

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Converting Application Package The "converting application package" provides a FB library of the standard functions used for converting control and application examples of the library (programs and GOT screens). Users can easily create applications by programming with the libraries required for the system used and utilizing application screens.

1.2 Application Examples This application package can be used for controlling a wide range of machines to execute the following rewinder/unwinder controls.

Laminator This machine laminates both sides of a base material with films and rewinds the material.

Coater This machine applies a coating agent on films and rewinds the material.

1 OVERVIEW 1.1 Converting Application Package 19

20

Film forming machine This machine melts resin with a solvent to form a film.

Slitter This machine slits a material such as film, paper, and metal with knives in a specified width and rewinds the material.

Inspection equipment This equipment finds defects on the surface of a material such as film, paper, and metal with inspection cameras.

Rewinding equipment This equipment creates multiple small rolls from a large roll.

1 OVERVIEW 1.2 Application Examples

1

Printing machine This machine unwinds a roll paper and produces newspaper, magazines, or others.

Packaging machine This machine unwinds a packaging film to pack foods, cosmetics, or others.

Flat rewinder This machine rewinds the material of lithium batteries or others with a flat type roll.

1 OVERVIEW 1.2 Application Examples 21

22

1.3 Converting "Converting" is to process a web material.

Role of each part of a converting line The following figure shows the role of each part of a converting control line.

Relation among tension, torque, and winding diameter This section describes the relation between the tension and the torque for feeding a web material. The term "torque" means the force to be applied on the rotary shaft. When a web material is fed out, it is fed rightward because the regenerative torque of the roll shaft is weaker than the motor torque. In this case, the tension (F) applied on the material is determined depending on the regenerative torque (T) on the weaker side. The following shows the relation between the torque (T) and the tension (F) at that time:

In-feed This section prevents the tension fluctuation of unwinding from being transmitted to the machining section.

Out-feed This section prevents the tension fluctuation of rewinding from being transmitted to the machining section.

Unwinding This axis unwinds a web material with the constant tension.

Rewinding This axis properly rewinds a web material not to affect the next process.

Main axis This axis feeds the material at the standard speed of the whole line.

Motor torque

Torque (T)

Tension (F)

Outer diameter (D) F (Tension) =

T (Torque) r (Radius)

(D = 2 r)

1 OVERVIEW 1.3 Converting

1

Tension control methods There are mainly two tension control methods, the method using speed control and the method using torque control. Select a proper method for actual use conditions.

Speed control In speed control, the speed of feeding a material is controlled to stabilize the tension. To control the tension of a material, it is necessary to change the pressurization of the dancer roll and correct the speed with the tension feedback value using tension detectors.

Speed control using tension detectors Speed control can be performed in a simple configuration. The tension accuracy of the speed control is superior to the one of the dancer control. The tension stability is rather low. The controllability considerably changes depending on the material characteristics.

Feed roll

Feed motor

Unwinder motor

Dancer roll

M

Correction value Calculation

Line velocity Target tension

Winding diameter + Velocity command

Current value of tension

1 OVERVIEW 1.3 Converting 23

24

Speed control using dancer rolls The tension stability is high even in acceleration/deceleration. Synchronization can be easily achieved even though the path is long. Dancer rolls absorb shocks. The tension accuracy depends on the air pressure and machine mechanism.

Torque control In torque control, only the torque required to control the tension working on a web material is controlled, and the friction resistance and inertia torque are corrected depending on the actual equipment and operation patterns.

M

Correction value Calculation

Line velocity Target position

Winding diameter + Velocity command

Dancer position

SpringDamper

Feed roll

Feed motor

Unwinder motor

1 OVERVIEW 1.3 Converting

1

Torque control using tension detectors The tension control accuracy is high. The operation at a constant speed is stable. Correction control is required in acceleration/deceleration. When the path is long, the response speed is low.

Torque control without tension detectors Speed control can be performed in a simple configuration. Stable torque control is achieved without being affected by abrupt disturbance. Correction control is required in acceleration/deceleration. The absolute accuracy of the tension is low.

M

Correction value

Calculation

Target tension

Winding diameter/2

+

Torque command

Current value of tension

MTarget tension

Winding diameter/2

Torque command

1 OVERVIEW 1.3 Converting 25

26

1.4 Product Configuration This product is the CONVERTING package for MELSEC iQ-R series. Select and prepare MELSEC iQ-R power supply modules, base units, PLC CPUs, Simple Motion modules, I/Os, intelligent modules, servo amplifiers, driving devices such as inverters, and GOTs appropriate to the system used.

Products in the iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING package

AP20-CNV002AA-M Check that all the products in the following table are included in a package.

*1 There are two iQ Monozukuri seals included for each license (one spare seal).

1.5 Files in DVD-ROM The following table describes the composition of the files in the DVD-ROM (converting package) included in this package.

Name Quantity Remarks Before Using the Product 1

END-USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 1

License Certificate 1

License Key Request Instructions 1

iQ Monozukuri seal*1 Number of licenses 2

Converting package (DVD-ROM) 1 For details, refer to the following. Page 26 Files in DVD-ROM

Folder File name*1 File type (Extension)

Description Required application

Package root/ RD77MS

Manual English bcnb62005740eng* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (English)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005740eng* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Japanese bcnb62005739* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Japanese)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005739* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Simplified Chinese

bcnb62005741chn* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Chinese (Simplified))

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005741chn* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Lib CNV_TensionControl_R_**** Application library (.mslm)

FB library for converting applications MELSOFT GX Works3

Project Basic AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 77MS16_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GT Works3

FlatWind AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 77MS16_FlatWind_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_FlatWind_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GT Works3

LicRegSupport LicRegSupport Tool (.xlsm) License key registration support tool Microsoft Excel

AP20- CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs for registering a license key to the CPU module

MELSOFT GX Works3

Simulator setup Setup file (.exe) Setup file for the converting simulator MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA Text file (.txt) Version information

1 OVERVIEW 1.4 Product Configuration

1

Package root/ RD77GF

Manual English bcnb62005740eng* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (English)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005740eng* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Japanese bcnb62005739* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Japanese)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005739* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Simplified Chinese

bcnb62005741chn* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Chinese (Simplified))

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005741chn* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Lib CNV_TensionControl_R_**** Application library (.mslm)

FB library for converting applications MELSOFT GX Works3

Project Basic AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 77GF16_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 77GF16_CCINV_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding) using an inverter, the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GT Works3

FlatWind AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 77GF16_FlatWind_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_FlatWind_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GT Works3

LicRegSupport LicRegSupport Tool (.xlsm) License key registration support tool Microsoft Excel

AP20- CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs for registering a license key to the CPU module

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA Text file (.txt) Version information

Package root/ RD78G(S)

Manual English bcnb62005740eng* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (English)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005740eng* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Japanese bcnb62005739* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Japanese)

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005739* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Simplified Chinese

bcnb62005741chn* PDF file (.pdf) iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING Instruction Manual (Chinese (Simplified))

Adobe Reader

bcnb62005741chn* e-Manual file (.ema)

e-Manual Viewer

Lib CNV_TensionControl_R_**** Application library (.mslm)

FB library for converting applications MELSOFT GX Works3

Project Basic AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 78G16_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for unwinding (speed winding) and rewinding (torque winding), the basic converting applications

MELSOFT GT Works3

FlatWind AP20-CNV002AA-R16- 78G16_FlatWind_****

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA- GT27nnV_FlatWind_****

GT Designer3 project file (.GTX)

Screens (example) for flat type rewinding

MELSOFT GT Works3

LicRegSupport LicRegSupport Tool (.xlsm) License key registration support tool Microsoft Excel

AP20- CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite

GX Works3 project file (.gx3)

Programs for registering a license key to the CPU module

MELSOFT GX Works3

AP20-CNV002AA Text file (.txt) Version information

Folder File name*1 File type (Extension)

Description Required application

1 OVERVIEW 1.5 Files in DVD-ROM 27

28

*1 "*" indicates their versions.

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal

iQAP_Data setup Setup file (.exe) Installer of this application package data for the integrated management tool

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal

Folder File name*1 File type (Extension)

Description Required application

1 OVERVIEW 1.5 Files in DVD-ROM

1

1.6 Applicable Hardware and Software The following table lists applicable models and versions of the engineering tool.

Item Model PLC CPU module R**CPU, R**ENCPU (R16CPU or a PLC CPU with higher capacity and specifications is

recommended.) Use the module with a firmware version of "25" or later. When using the RD78G(S), use the module with a firmware version of "44" or later.

Simple Motion module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S) Use the RD78G(S) with a firmware version of "16" or later.

Engineering environment (controller) MELSOFT GX Works3 Version 1.076E or later

Engineering environment (GOT) MELSOFT GT Works3 Version 1.220E or later

Application integration management software MELSOFT iQ AppPortal Version 1.23Z or later

1 OVERVIEW 1.6 Applicable Hardware and Software 29

30

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

2.1 Registering a License Key To use this application package, register a license key to the PLC CPU module that executes applications. Follow the steps below to register a license key.

To execute the application before getting a license key, use a temporary license. The temporary license is valid for two months (from the registration date of the temporary license to the same day in the month after next). For how to register a temporary license, refer to the following. Page 298 Temporary License Registration

Items to be prepared

Creating and executing the program 1. Opening the license key registration project (AP20-CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite.gx3). Copy the license key registration project (AP20-CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite.gx3) in the supplied DVD to a folder in the personal computer, and open the file. The project is created for the R16CPU. When using a model other than R16CPU, change the model. * When registering a license key to multiple PLC CPU modules, register it one by one.

2. Preparing the program using the license key registration support tool When this tool is not used, follow the procedure described in "3. Editing the initial program". Copy the license key registration support tool (LicRegSupport.xlsm) in the supplied DVD to a folder in the personal

computer, and open the file. When the file is read-only, clear the read-only status. When the macro is disabled, enable it. Input the product ID and license key, and press the [Program Generation] button.

Item Description Product ID Numbers that are described in the "License Certificate"

License key Follow the "License Key Request Instructions" to get a license key.

License key registration project (AP20-CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite.gx3)

A project for registering a license key to the PLC CPU module. It is included in the supplied DVD. FormatLicense (Macro type) CNV_LicenseWrite (Macro type)

License key registration support tool (LicRegSupport.xlsm)

A tool that generates a license key registration program (ST instructions). It is included in the supplied DVD. When the operating environment for Office is not installed, register the license key manually without this tool. [Operating environment] Microsoft Office 2010, Microsoft Office 2013, Microsoft Office 2016

123-123456789

11AA12AB13AC14AD21BA22BB23BC24BD31CA32CB33CC34CD41DA42DB43DC44DD

Click.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 Registering a License Key

2

The program in ST language is output. Press the [Copy] button. The output program is copied to the clipboard.

Follow the steps described in "3. Editing the initial program" to edit the program. After editing the program, press the [Close] button to end the tool.

Precautions Any operation in Excel is disabled while the license key registration support tool is being used. End the tool after using it.

Click.

Click.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 Registering a License Key 31

32

3. Editing the initial program Select "Program" "Initial" in the Navigation window and open the registered program. (Program name: Initial) Set the license key to the license key label (wLicensekey) of the initial program. Setting with the license key registration support tool When the license key registration support tool is not used, refer to "Manual setting". Press the [Copy] button to copy the program in ST language which is output to the license key registration support tool to the clipboard. Select all of the existing ST program and paste the copied program in the initial program.

After pasting the program, follow the procedure described in "4. Writing and executing the program". Manual setting Refer to the following example to set the license key and product ID to the initial program.

Open.

Attach.

11AA12AB13AC14AD21BA22BB23BC24BD31CA32CB33CC34CD41DA42DB43DC44DD

Snip

License key (example) Product ID (example) 123-123456879

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 Registering a License Key

2

4. Writing and executing the program Write the created program to the PLC CPU module and execute it. Select "Convert" "Rebuild All" from the menu and convert all the program created in step 3. When an error occurs, check

the details and correct the program. Select "Online" "Write to PLC" from the menu and write all the program to the PLC CPU module. Set the PLC CPU module to the RUN state and execute the scan program. Select "Program" "Scan" in the Navigation

window and open the registered program. (Program name: LicenseWrite) The scan program includes the function block (FormatLicense) for formatting the license key registration area and the function block (CNV_LicenseWrite) for writing the license key.

When registering the license key to the PLC CPU module for the first time, format the license key registration area. Format it before registering the license key.

When another license of iQ Monozukuri has been registered, register the license without formatting it. When the temporary license has already been registered, the expiration date is cleared by registering the

obtained license key.

Formatting the license key registration area Turn on the execution flag (ExecuteFormat) of the function block (FormatLicense) in the scan program. Normal completion (o_bComp) or Error completion (o_bError) becomes TRUE. At the error completion, check the PLC CPU error details. Turn off the execution flag (ExecuteFormat) after checking the output of the function block.

Registering the license key Turn on the execution flag (WriteLicense) of the function block (CNV_LicenseWrite) in the scan program. Normal completion (o_bOK) or Error completion (o_bError) becomes TRUE. At the error completion, refer to Troubleshooting. (Page 34 Troubleshooting) When Normal operation (o_bOK) turns on, the license key registration is completed. Turn off the execution flag (WriteLicense).

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 Registering a License Key 33

34

5. Deleting the license key registration program After the license key registration has been completed, delete the program in the PLC CPU module. Select "Online" "Delete PLC Data" from the menu and select the [Select All] button in the "Online Data Operation" window to delete the program. The license key registration project is not used after the registration. Save it as necessary and end it.

Troubleshooting The following table lists errors that occur during the license key registration and corrective actions.

Precautions The license key is held after the power-off since it is written to the device data storage file. If the data memory has been reset by operating the CPU memory of GX Works3, registration information of all registered

license keys will be lost. If the license key registration area of the device data storage file has been operated with SLMP or the FTP server function,

license information may be lost. For the license key registration FB, set "FB type" to "Macro type".

Error details Cause Corrective action After "CNV_LicenseWrite" has been executed, Error completion (o_bError) turns on and Normal completion (o_bOK) remains off.

The license key registration area has never been formatted.

The license key outside the range of the memory was trying to be written.

Format the license key registration area using "FormatLicense" and register the license key using "CNV_LicenseWrite". Using "FormatLicense" deletes other registered license keys. Register them again.

After "CNV_LicenseWrite" is executed, neither of Normal completion (o_bOK) and Error completion (o_bError) turns on.

The PLC CPU module is not in the RUN state.

"Macro type" is not specified for "FB type" of the license key registration FB.

Set the PLC CPU module to the RUN state. Specify "Macro type" for "FB type" of the license key registration FB.

Click.

Click.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.1 Registering a License Key

2

2.2 Registering the FB Library The following describes the procedure for registering the FB library in the list. For the library file name and details of the library, refer to Page 47 FB LIBRARY.

1. Copy the library file (*.mslm) in the supplied DVD to anywhere in a personal computer.

2. Start GX Works3, select "Project" "New", and click the [Element Selection] icon.

3. The Element Selection window appears. Click the Library tag and select the Library.

4. Click the [Register to Library List] icon.

5. Click [Register Library].

Click.

Click.

Click.

Click.

Click.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.2 Registering the FB Library 35

36

6. The dialog box shown on the left appears. Click the [OK] button.

7. The "Register Library to Library List" window appears. Select the library file (*.mslm) copied in the personal computer and click the [Open] button.

8. Imported FBs are displayed in the Element Selection window.

9. Select the FB to be used from the Element Selection window, and drag and drop it into the work window. The FB is added in the Navigation window.

10.Open [Property].

Click.

Drag and drop an FB.

The FB is added.

Click.

Right-click.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.2 Registering the FB Library

2

When the subroutine type is set as the FB type, the size of programs can be reduced but the processing speed becomes slow. Fixed cycle execution is recommended for some FBs. Check the fixed cycle interval setting.

11. Select a FB type.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.2 Registering the FB Library 37

38

2.3 Updating Library Elements The procedure for updating the library elements differs depending on the type of the programming language. For details on the procedure for updating the library elements, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual If the elements of a library imported to a project cannot be updated, delete the library elements (FBs and structures) in the Navigation window, and then drag and drop FBs of a new version into the Navigation window. Unless the old library elements in the Navigation window are deleted, the update cannot be performed.

Replacement when updating a project of version 1.010L or earlier to 1.011M or later Library change Replacement method Change the data type of the variables AxisNo. and StartIO in the AXIS_REF structure to word [unsigned].

Change the variable data type of I/O No. and axis No. to word [unsigned]. Correct the data type error in the type conversion instruction so that the data type matches.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.3 Updating Library Elements

2

2.4 Certifying the License Key To use the FB library supplied with this application package, certify the registered license key. For the license key certification, arrange the function block in the scan program of the user program.

Arrangement of the license certification FB (CNV_Activation) in the user program The license certification FB (CNV_Activation) must be executed before the library FBs. Place it at the front of the user-created GX Works3 project scan program. If there are multiple scan programs, place it in the program to be executed first. The license certification FB does not operate correctly in non-scan programs. The license certification FB is executed by arranging it only.

How to check the program to be executed first

Placement in the license certification FB scan program

Item Description License certification FB (CNV_Activation)

This FB certifies the license. It is supplied with the FB library. Set "FB type" to "Macro type" before using this function block.

Program to be executed first

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.4 Certifying the License Key 39

40

CPU parameter setting of the user program Select "Parameter" CPU module "CPU Parameter" in the Navigation window to open the setting item window. Select "File Setting" "File Setting for Device Data Storage" in the CPU parameter window. Set "Use Or Not Setting" to "Use".

Precautions This package uses addresses 0 to 1023 (1K word) of the data storage file (DEVSTORE.QST). When using the device data

storage file, set the file to 2K words or more and use the address 1024 or later. If data is accidentally written to the addresses 0 to 1023 of the data storage file, license information may be lost. In this

case, register the license again. In this package program example, "access from external devices" is enabled in the global label. After writing the program

example to the CPU module, reset the memory when disabling "access from external devices". If the memory has been reset, registration information of all registered license keys will be lost. In such a case, register the licenses again.

Operation check of user program certification Write the user program to the PLC CPU module and check the operation of the license certification FB (CNV_Activation). When the license key is normally certified, Normal completion (o_bActivateOK) becomes TRUE. When Error completion (o_bError) turns on, check "Troubleshooting". After checking the normal operation, attach the "iQ Monozukuri seal" on the CPU module. (REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY)

Troubleshooting The following table lists errors that occur during the license key certification and corrective actions.

Error details Cause Corrective action "o_bActivateOK" of "CNV_Activation" is not TRUE but "o_bError" is TRUE.

The license key of the corresponding application package is not registered.

Register the license key. (Page 30 Registering a License Key)

The expiration date of the temporary license (two months) passed.

Get and register the license key. (Page 30 Registering a License Key)

The CPU module outputs the error code (2840H) and stops.

"Not Use" is set to "File Setting for Device Data Storage".

Set "File Setting for Device Data Storage" to "Use" in the CPU parameter and write the CPU parameter. (Page 39 Certifying the License Key)

The CPU module outputs the error code (3100H) and stops.

The firmware version of the PLC CPU module is not "25" or later.

Update the firmware version of the PLC CPU module to "25" or later.

The PLC CPU module outputs the error code (32FFH) and stops.

An incorrect license key is registered. 1) The product ID, PLC CPU module

model, or manufacturing information at the request is incorrect.

2) The license key is trying to be certified with a PLC CPU module that is not requested.

1) Delete the registered license key using "FormatLicense" and register the correct license key.

2) Delete the registered license key from the PLC CPU module where data is accidentally written by using "FormatLicense" and register the license key in the requested PLC CPU module.

Using "FormatLicense" deletes other registered license keys. Register them again.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.4 Certifying the License Key

2

Replacing method of the module When replacing the PLC CPU module To replace the CPU module, a new license key is required. For the new license key, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. When replacing a module other than the PLC CPU module (such as a Simple Motion module) No specific operation is required. Refer to the manual of the module to replace the module.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.4 Certifying the License Key 41

42

2.5 Converting Simulator

Installing the converting simulator Check the following before installation. Log on to a personal computer as a user with the administrator authority. Before installation, close all running applications on the Microsoft Windows Operating System. If the converting

simulator is installed while other applications are running, the product may not run normally.

1. Execute "Packageroot\RD77MS\Simulator\setup.exe" included in the supplied DVD.

2. Select the necessary information according to the instructions shown on the screen.

Uninstalling the converting simulator Uninstall the converting simulator setting from the control panel of Windows.

Executing the converting simulator For how to use the converting simulator, refer to the following. Page 280 CONVERTING SIMULATOR The converting simulator can be run by starting the system simulation from GX Works3 on the personal computer where the converting simulator setting is installed. If the converting simulator setting is not installed, the converting simulator does not run. However, the normal system simulation can be performed. When only performing simulation, license key certification is not required. For details of the operation method, refer to help of the converting simulator.

2 SETTING AND PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2.5 Converting Simulator

3

3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION

3.1 System Configuration Example The following figure shows the system configuration example of this application.

*1 For this package, the R16CPU or a PLC CPU with higher capacity and specifications is recommended. *2 When using the Motion module RD78G, set the Simple Motion mode.

For the Simple Motion mode, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Network) MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Application for Simple Motion Mode) MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Advanced Synchronous Control for Simple Motion Mode)

Rewinder axis

Tension detector

Power supply module Servo amplifier/Inverter

Unwinder axis

PLC CPU*1

Dancer roll

GOT

Simple Motion module*2

SSCNET/H, CC-Link IE Field, CC-Link IE TSN

Tension sensor control Dancer control Roll diameter calculation

Application program, tension control FB group

Parameter settings Control monitor Tuning Graph display

Application screens

Analog input module /High-speed counter module, etc.

Edge sensorEdge

position axis

Edge sensor Edge position axis (Nip roll: Lateral movement)

Line axis

The reel change function can be easily added because it has been prepared as a program example.

A-axis

B-axis

Turret axis

Reel change function

3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 3.1 System Configuration Example 43

44

3.2 Electronic Gear Setting In this FB, the velocities of the unwinder and rewinder axes are calculated in units of [r/min] and the velocities of the line and intermediate axes are calculated in units of [m/min]. Set the electronic gear of the Simple Motion module as follows. Unwinder axis, rewinder axis: 1 [mm] (1000.00 [m]) for 1 rotation of the equipment Line axis, intermediate axis: Travel distance per rotation of the motor [m] (Roller circumference/Gear ratio) Unwinder axis (Axis 1): Gear ratio of the machine/motor = 1/3 (Motor: 4194304 [pulse/r]) Line axis (Axis 2): Gear ratio of the perimeter of the machine roll (500 [mm])/motor = 1/5 (Motor: 4194304 [pulse/r])

Unwinder axis 1.00 [r/min] Motion command 1.00 [mm/min] Line axis 1.00 [m/min] Motion command 1000.00 [mm/min]

Precautions The above setting example is applied also when the RD78G(S) and the amplifier MR-J5 are connected. For the setting of the MR-J5, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 3.2 Electronic Gear Setting

3

3.3 Rotation Direction Setting Set the rotation direction in the servo parameter depending on the equipment used so that unwinding/rewinding is performed in the forward direction. Set WinderType*1: 0 for the unwinder axis and WinderType*1: 1 for the rewinder axis. To switch upper unwinding and lower unwinding, or upper rewinding and lower rewinding with a single machine, switch WinderType*1 between 0 and 2, or 1 and 3. Rewinding can be performed with the unwinder axis or unwinding can be performed with the rewinder axis issuing a minus (-) speed command to the line speed input of the FB. *1 WinderType (FB winding method setting)

FB input (Winding method) Installation direction of the motor

Servo parameter PA14 (POL)

0 (Forward direction: CCW (Counterclockwise direction))

1: (Forward direction: CW (Clockwise direction))

WinderType: 0 (Forward unwinding)

WinderType: 1 (Forward rewinding)

WinderType: 2 (Backward unwinding)

Upper unwinding Lower unwinding Lower unwinding Upper unwinding

Lower unwinding Upper unwinding Upper unwinding Lower unwinding

Lower rewinding Upper rewinding Upper rewinding Lower rewinding

Upper rewinding Lower rewinding Lower rewinding Upper rewinding

Lower unwinding Upper unwinding Upper unwinding Lower unwinding

Upper unwinding Lower unwinding Lower unwinding Upper unwinding

3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 3.3 Rotation Direction Setting 45

46

WinderType: 3 (Backward rewinding)

FB input (Winding method) Installation direction of the motor

Servo parameter PA14 (POL)

0 (Forward direction: CCW (Counterclockwise direction))

1: (Forward direction: CW (Clockwise direction))

Upper rewinding Lower rewinding Lower rewinding Upper rewinding

Lower rewinding Upper rewinding Upper rewinding Lower rewinding

3 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 3.3 Rotation Direction Setting

4

4 FB LIBRARY This FB library is designed for the tension control using the Simple Motion module.

4.1 Functions of the FB Library List of FBs The following table lists the FBs in the FB library (CNV_TensionControl_R).

No. Item FB name Description Rewinder/unwinder control Inter mediate axis control

Flat roll

Refer enceSpeed mode Torque mode

Tens ion sens or

Dan cer

No sens or

Sens or

No sens or

01 Tension control

CNV_WinderTensionVelocity Ctrl

Tension sensor feedback velocity control

Page 53

CNV_WinderDancerVelocity Ctrl

Dancer feedback velocity control

Page 56

CNV_WinderTensionTorque Ctrl

Tension sensor feedback torque control

Page 59

CNV_WinderTensionSensorl essCtrl

Tension sensorless torque control

Page 63

CNV_TensionSensorlessVel ocityCtrl

Tension sensorless velocity control

Page 66

02 Tension control (intermedi ate axis)

CNV_FeedTensionVelocityC trl

Tension sensor feedback velocity control

Page 70

CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCt rl

Dancer feedback velocity control

Page 73

CNV_DrawCtrl Draw control Page 76

03 Velocity generator

CNV_LineVelocityGenerator Line velocity generator Page 78

04 Roll diameter calculation

CNV_DiaCalcVelocity Roll diameter calculation (Velocity ratio method)

Page 80

CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (web thickness integration method)

Page 82

CNV_DiaCalcFeed Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method)

Page 85

05 Torque compensa tion

CNV_WinderInertiaTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation

Page 88

CNV_InertiaCalc Load inertia ratio calculation Page 90

CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTor que

Inertia compensation torque calculation (Motor inertia ratio)

Page 92

CNV_InertiaEstimation Inertia estimation Page 94

CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc Inertia compensation torque calculation (Inertia estimation value)

Page 96

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque Friction compensation torque calculation

Page 88

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasur ement

Friction torque measurement Page 101

CNV_TensionDeviationMeas urement

Tension deviation measurement

Page 104

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library 47

48

: FB required for control : Any of these FBs is required for control. : Used in FB (depending on the intended use) : Used depending on the intended use

06 Tuning function

CNV_WinderGainChange Gain change Page 109

CNV_TaperTension Taper tension calculation Page 111

CNV_PIDControl PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning)

Page 115

07 Additional function

CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge position control Page 118

CNV_WebBreakDetect Web break detection Page 121

08 Flat roll CNV_FlatWindingCamMeas urement

Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method)

Page 124

CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method)

Page 127

09 Filters STD_Lowpass1 Low-pass filter Page 129

STD_AverageValueFilter Moving average filter Page 131

STD_Limiter Limiter Page 132

STD_TableInterpolation Table interpolation (2000 points)

Page 134

STD_Table50Interpolation Table interpolation (50 points)

Page 136

STD_RampGenerator Ramp generator Page 138

99 Activation CNV_Activation License activation Page 39

No. Item FB name Description Rewinder/unwinder control Inter mediate axis control

Flat roll

Refer enceSpeed mode Torque mode

Tens ion sens or

Dan cer

No sens or

Sens or

No sens or

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library

4

Version history The following table shows the version history of the FB library (CNV_TensionControl_R).

Version Description 1.000A First edition

1.001B CNV_DiaCalcFeed (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method)) has been added. CNV_EdgePositionCtrl (Edge position control) has been added. CNV_WebBreakDetect (Web break detection) has been added. RD77GF has been supported and initial value settings for Execution cycle have been deleted. In velocity has been added as an output label in CNV_LineVelocityGenerator (Line velocity generator).

1.003D STD_RampGenerator (Ramp generator) has been added.

1.004E FBs have been added. CNV_Activation (License activation) CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl (Tension sensor feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)) CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl (Dancer feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)) CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement (Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method)) CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc (Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method))

1.006G The following FBs have been modified. CNV_Activation (License activation) CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement has been supported simulation. CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc has been supported simulation. CNV_PIDControl (PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning)) STD_AverageValueFilter (Moving average filter) CNV_DiaCalcFeed (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method)) CNV_EdgePositionCtrl (Edge position control) CNV_LineVelocityGenerator (Line velocity generator)

1.007H Number of friction toque table points of CNV_WinderFrictionTorque (Friction compensation torque calculation) has been changed from 2000 to 50.

Number of measuring points of CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Friction torque measurement) has been changed from 2000 to 50.

Friction torque table structure has been added.

1.008J CNV_Activation (License activation) has supported the temporary license.

1.009K The following FBs have been modified. CNV_WinderGainChange (Gain change) CNV_InertiaCalc (Load inertia ratio calculation)

1.010L The following FBs have been added. CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement (Tension deviation measurement) CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl (Tension sensorless velocity control) STD_Table50Interpolation (Table interpolation (50 points)) CNV_InertiaEstimation (Inertia estimation) CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc (Inertia compensation torque calculation (Inertia estimation value))

The following FBs have been modified. The input label of the tension correction value has been added to CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl (Tension sensor feedback torque

control). The input label of the tension correction value has been added to CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl (Tension sensorless torque

control). CNV_DiaCalcThickness (Roll diameter calculation (web thickness integration method)) CNV_DiaCalcFeed (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method)) CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Friction torque measurement) CNV_InertiaCalc (Load inertia ratio calculation)

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library 49

50

Restrictions and precautions common to all FBs The number of FB steps in a program varies depending on the CPU model to be used and I/O definitions. When combining macro and subroutine types in the program, use the R**CPU or R**ENCPU with a firmware version of

"26" or later. When using the RD78G(S), use the module with a firmware version of "44" or later. For FBs with the following restriction or precaution: "Execute this FB in a fixed cycle."

1.011M The data type of AXIS_REF structure in the following FBs have been changed. CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl CNV_DrawCtrl CNV_LineVelocityGenerator CNV_DiaCalcThickness CNV_DiaCalcFeed CNV_InertiaEstimation CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement CNV_EdgePositionCtrl CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc

The following FBs have been modified. CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement CNV_WebBreakDetect

1.012N The following FBs have been modified to support the RD78G(S). CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl CNV_DrawCtrl CNV_LineVelocityGenerator CNV_DiaCalcThickness CNV_DiaCalcFeed CNV_InertiaEstimation CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement CNV_EdgePositionCtrl CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc

When using the FBs in the RD77MS and RD77GF, executing them in Motion calculation cycle event task (I44: Inter- module synchronization) is recommended. When using the FBs in the RD78G(S), executing them in the calculation cycle of the RD78G(S) is recommended. For the calculation cycle setting of the RD78G(S), refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

Version Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library

4

Operation timing The following figure shows the operation timing at start/stop in this FB. Real-time execution

*1 When a value outside the range is input during normal operation, an error code is output but the operation continues using the previous normal value. After that, when a normal value is input, the error code is cleared.

[Normal operation]

i_bEN (Execution command)

i_bENO (Executing)

o_bOK (Normal operation)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0

o_eCommand**** (Output command)

[Error completion]

i_bEN (Execution command)

i_bENO (Executing)

o_bOK (Normal operation)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0

o_eCommand**** (Output command)

Error code 0

[When a value input to the FB is outside the range]

i_bEN (Execution command)

i_bENO (Executing)

o_bOK (Normal operation)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0

i_e**** (Input value)

Error code 0

Outside the range

Error code 0

*1

Normal value Normal valueOutside the range

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library 51

52

Pulsed execution (multiple scan execution type)

*Hold i_bEN (Execution command) on until o_bOK (Normal completion) turns on.

*When i_bEN (Execution command) is turned off before o_bOK (Normal completion) or o_bErr (Error completion) turns on, stop the FB operation processing and end it with o_bOK (Normal completion) or o_bErr (Error completion) that remains off.

The FB stop processing due to the PLC CPU error is not performed. When the operation setting at an error detection is set to continue (default: stop) in the CPU parameter, the FB does not stop due to a CPU error. To stop the FB when a CPU error occurs, use the FB with the operation at an error detection sets to stop in the CPU parameter.

[Normal completion]

i_bEN (Execution command)

i_bENO (Executing)

o_bOK (Normal completion)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0

o_**** (Output value) FB operation result

FB operation processing

0 or the previous value

[Error completion]

i_bEN (Execution command)

i_bENO (Executing)

o_bOK (Normal completion)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0 Error code 0

FB operation processing

o_**** (Output value) 0 or the previous value

4 FB LIBRARY 4.1 Functions of the FB Library

4

4.2 Details of the FB Library This section describes the details of each FB.

CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl (Tension sensor feedback velocity control)

Name CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB executes the PID control according to the value detected by the tension detector and controls the velocity so that the

tension reaches the specified tension.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4559 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

Function description The velocity is calculated according to the roll diameter so that the rewinder velocity (roll circumferential velocity) reaches the line velocity, the velocity correction value is calculated by the PID control with the deviation of the tension setting value of tension detector value, and the value is output as a command velocity to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Execution command

Setting value of tension

Current value of tension

Coefficient of tension taper

Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity

Execution cycle

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Velocity correction

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_eAdditiveVelocity :E

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionSetVal

E: i_eTensionActVal

E: i_eTensionTaper

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl

PID controlSetting value of tension

Velocity command

Current value of tension

+Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity

Winder axis

Tension detector Line axis

Coefficient of tension taper Velocity correction

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 53

54

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0<= Input the target value of tension [N].

Current value of tension

i_eTensionActVal Single precision real number

Input the value of the tension detector [N].

Coefficient of tension taper

i_eTensionTaper Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Taper coefficient of the set tension value (1.0 = 100%)

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Input the current value of the roll diameter [mm].

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [r/ min]

Velocity correction o_eAdditiveVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity correction determined by PID calculation [m/ min]

Name Label name Data type Description Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Proportionality gain [(m/min)/N]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [m/min]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [m/min]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Setting of deadband [N]

Amplitude of auto tuning

eMrly IN Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Amplitude at auto turning [N]

Start auto tuning bAtStart IN Bit On: The auto turning is started.

Auto tuning response

wAtResponse IN Word [Signed] 1 to 7 3 1 (Weak) 7(Strong)

Enable auto tuning bAtValEN IN Bit On: The PID control is performed with auto tuning results. Off: The PID control is performed with setting values.

Normal completion of auto tuning

bAtComp OUT Bit On: Turns on when the auto tuning is normally completed. Off: Turn off when Start auto tuning turns off.

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

eTehys OUT Single precision real number

Hysteresis of auto tuning results [N]

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results

eAtKp OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results [(m/ min)/N]

Integral time of auto tuning results

eAtTi OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Integral time of auto tuning results [ms]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 55

56

CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl (Dancer feedback velocity control)

Name CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB detects the position of the dancer roll and controls the velocity to reach the target position.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4486 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

Function description The velocity is calculated depending on the outer diameter of the roll so that the rewinder velocity (roll circumferential velocity) reaches the line velocity, the velocity correction value is calculated by the PID control with the deviation of the current value of the dancer to the set dancer position, and the value is output as a command velocity to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDancerSetVal

E: i_eDancerActVal

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_eAdditiveVelocity :E

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Setting value of dancer

Current value of dancer

Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity

Execution cycle

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Velocity correction

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl

PID control Setting value of dancer

Velocity command

Current value of dancer

+Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity

Winder axis

Line axis

Velocity correction

Dancer roll

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of dancer

i_eDancerSetVal Single precision real number

Input the target position of the dancer roll [mm or degree].

Current value of dancer

i_eDancerActVal Single precision real number

Input the current value of the dancer roll [mm or degree].

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Input the current value of the roll diameter [mm].

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [r/ min]

Velocity correction o_eAdditiveVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity correction determined by PID calculation [m/ min]

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Proportionality gain [(m/min)/mm or (m/min)/degree]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [m/min]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 57

58

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [m/min]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Setting of deadband [mm or degree]

Amplitude of auto tuning

eMrly IN Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Amplitude at auto turning [mm or degree]

Start auto tuning bAtStart IN Bit On: The auto turning is started.

Auto tuning response

wAtResponse IN Word [Signed] 1 to 7 3 1 (Weak) 7(Strong)

Enable auto tuning bAtValEN IN Bit On: The PID control is performed with auto tuning results. Off: The PID control is performed with setting values.

Normal completion of auto tuning

bAtComp OUT Bit On: Turns on when the auto tuning is normally completed. Off: Turn off when Start auto tuning turns off.

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

eTehys OUT Single precision real number

Hysteresis of auto tuning results [mm or degree]

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results

eAtKp OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results [(m/min)/mm or (m/min)/degree]

Integral time of auto tuning results

eAtTi OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Integral time of auto tuning results [ms]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl (Tension sensor feedback torque control)

Name CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB performs the PID control according to the value detected by the tension detector and controls the torque so that the

torque reaches the set tension value.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4836 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionSetVal

E: i_eTensionActVal

E: i_eTensionTaper

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eInertiaTrq

E: i_eFrictionTrq

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eVelocityAdj

E: i_eVelocityOffset

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandTorque :E

o_eAdditiveTorque :E

o_eVelocityLimit :E

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Setting value of tension

Current value of tension

Coefficient of tension taper

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Torque of friction compensation

Line velocity

Coefficient of velocity limit

Offset of velocity limit

Execution cycle

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Torque command value

Torque correction value

Velocity command

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl

Tension correction value E: i_eTensionAdjVal

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 59

60

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Function description The tension torque is calculated according to the roll diameter, the deviation of the tension setting value to the tension detector value is multiplied by the tension correction value that is determined by the PID control, and the calculated value is output as a torque command to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0<= Input the target value of tension [N].

Current value of tension

i_eTensionActVal Single precision real number

Input the value of the tension detector [N].

Coefficient of tension taper

i_eTensionTaper Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Taper coefficient of the set tension value (1.0 = 100%)

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Input the current value of the roll diameter [mm].

Torque of inertia compensation

i_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Torque of inertia compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Torque of friction compensation

i_eFrictionTrq Single precision real number

0.0<= Torque of friction compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Coefficient of velocity limit

i_eVelocityAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Coefficient of velocity limit (1.0 = Line velocity 100%)

Velocity limit Offset value

i_eVelocityOffset Single precision real number

0.0<= Offset of velocity limit [m/min]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Tension correction value

i_eTensionAdjVal Single precision real number

Input the correction value of the tension deviations from free roller [N]

Item Description

PID control

Setting value of tension

- Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

- Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

Torque command

Tension torque

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Gear ratio

Coefficient of tension taper

Torque of friction compensation

Gear ratio

(Current value of roll diameter/2)

Current value of tension

Winder axis

Tension detectorLine axis

+

Line velocity

Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity Coefficient + Offset value

Velocity limit value

Tension correction value

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Torque command value

o_eCommandTorque Single precision real number

Torque command value of the FB calculation results [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Torque correction value

o_eAdditiveTorque Single precision real number

Tension correction value determined by PID calculation [N]

Velocity limit value o_eVelocityLimit Single precision real number

Velocity limit value of FB calculation results [r/min] (Equipment conversion)

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Gear ratio eWinderGearRatio IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Rated torque eWinderRatedTrq IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Proportionality gain [N/N]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [N]

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [N]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Setting of deadband [N]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 61

62

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl (Tension sensorless torque control)

Name CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB performs the torque control without sensors to control the tension in unwinding and rewinding.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1801 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The command torque is calculated from the roll diameter and compensation torque/tension correction value so that the tension reaches the set tension in unwinding and rewinding, and it is output to the servo amplifier.

CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionSetVal

E: i_eTensionTaper

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eInertiaTrq

E: i_eFrictionTrq

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eVelocityAdj

E: i_eVelocityOffset

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandTorque :E

o_eVelocityLimit :E

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Setting value of tension

Coefficient of tension taper

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Torque of friction compensation

Line velocity

Coefficient of velocity limit

Offset of velocity limit

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Torque command value

Velocity limit value

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Tension correction value E: i_eTensionAdjVal

Setting value of tension Torque commandTension

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Gear ratio

Coefficient of tension taper

Torque of friction compensation

Gear ratio

(Current value of roll diameter/2)

Winder axis

Line axis

Line velocity

Current value of roll diameter Velocity limit value

- Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

- Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

Line velocity Coefficient + Offset value

+ Tension correction value

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 63

64

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0<= Input the target value of tension [N].

Coefficient of tension taper

i_eTensionTaper Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Taper coefficient of the set tension value (1.0 = 100%)

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Input the current value of the roll diameter [mm].

Torque of inertia compensation

i_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Torque of inertia compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Torque of friction compensation

i_eFrictionTrq Single precision real number

0.0<= Torque of friction compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Coefficient of velocity limit

i_eVelocityAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Coefficient of velocity limit (1.0 = Line velocity 100%)

Offset of velocity limit

i_eVelocityOffset Single precision real number

0.0<= Offset of velocity limit [m/min]

Tension correction value

i_eTensionAdjVal Single precision real number

Input the correction value of the tension deviations from free roller [N]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Torque command value

o_eCommandTorque Single precision real number

Torque command value of the FB calculation results [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Velocity limit value o_eVelocityLimit Single precision real number

Velocity limit value of FB calculation results [r/min] (Equipment conversion)

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF

Item Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Gear ratio eWinderGearRatio IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Rated torque eWinderRatedTrq IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 65

66

CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl (Tension sensorless velocity control)

Name CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB performs the velocity control without sensors to control the tension in unwinding and rewinding.

The velocity command is corrected by the deviation of the command torque and actual torque.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2305 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionSetVal

E: i_eTensionTaper

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eInertiaTrq

E: i_eFrictionTrq

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eTensionAdjVal

DUT: i_stVelocityControl

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Setting value of tension

Coefficient of tension taper

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Torque of friction compensation

Line velocity

Tension correction value

Velocity control setting

Execution cycle

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Function description The command velocity is calculated from the roll diameter and line velocity so that the tension reaches the set tension in unwinding and rewinding, and it is output to the servo amplifier. The velocity is corrected with the deviation of the torque command value and torque feedback value calculated from the tension setting and torque compensation.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. Set the parameter PB25 (Function selection B-1) of the servo amplifier to 0h (enable model application control selection) and use

the FB. Set the parameter PA08 (Auto tuning mode) of the servo amplifier to 0003h (manual mode) and use the FB.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0 <= Input the target value of tension [N].

Coefficient of tension taper

i_eTensionTaper Single precision real number

0.0 <= 1.0 Taper coefficient of the set tension value (1.0 = 100%)

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Input the current value of the roll diameter [mm].

Torque of inertia compensation

i_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Torque of inertia compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Torque of friction compensation

i_eFrictionTrq Single precision real number

0.0 <= Torque of friction compensation [Nm] (Motor axis conversion)

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/min].

Tension correction value

i_eTensionAdjVal Single precision real number

Input the correction value of the tension deviations from free roller [N]

Velocity control setting

i_stVelocityControl VEL_CTRL_REF Refer to the velocity control setting.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Item Description

Setting value of tension Tension

torque

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation

Coefficient of tension taper

Torque of friction compensation

Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity value

Torque

command

+

-

+

Winder axis

Line axis

Gear ratio

(Current value of roll diameter/2)

- Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension + Inertia compensation + Friction compensation

Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

- Tension - Inertia compensation - Friction compensation

+ +

Correction upper limit value

Tension correction value

Gear ratio

Correction gain

Correction lower limit value

Line velocity

Velocity command

Motor current (actual torque)

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 67

68

Velocity control setting (VEL_CTRL_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name

I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Correction gain eAdjustGain IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= Gain [(r/min)/%] for velocity correction value calculated from deviation of the command torque and actual torque. Velocity control (no correction) is performed when this value is set to 0, and control close to torque control is performed when the value is increased.

Correction upper limit value

eUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

Speed correction upper limit value [r/min] calculated from deviation of the command torque and actual torque. When the correction value exceeds this value, the correction is performed with this value.

Correction lower limit value

eLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

Speed correction limit value [r/min] calculated from deviation of the command torque and actual torque. When the correction value is lower than this value, the correction is performed with this value.

Velocity integral compensation

eAmpVIC IN Single precision real number

0.1 to 1000.0

33.7 Set the same value as the parameter PB10 (Velocity integral compensation) of the servo amplifier [ms].

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [r/min]

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder control io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of winder axis io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Gear ratio eWinderGearRati o

IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Rated torque eWinderRatedTrq IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Rotation direction selection

uAmpPol IN Word [Unsigned] 0,1 0 Set the same value as the parameter PA14 (POL) of the servo amplifier. When the value other than 1 is set, the operation is performed regarding the value as 0.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 1 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 69

70

CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl (Tension sensor feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis))

Name CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB executes the PID control according to the value detected by the tension detector and controls the velocity so that the

tension reaches the specified tension.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4403 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

Function description The velocity correction is performed to the line speed with the PID control output according to a deviation between a setting value of tension and value of the tension detector, and the value is output as a command velocity to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. Set the electronic gear of the Simple Motion module for a feeding length per motor rotation of the feed axis calculated with the roll

circumference and reduction ratio.

Execution command

Setting value of tension

Current value of tension

Line velocity

Execution cycle

Setting of tension control

Setting of feed axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Velocity correction

Setting of tension control

Setting of feed axis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_eAdditiveVelocity :E

io_stFeedTensionCtrl :DUT

io_stFeedAxis :DUT

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionSetVal

E: i_eTensionActVal

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stFeedTensionCtrl

DUT: io_stFeedAxis

CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl

PID control Setting value of tension

Velocity command

Current value of tension

+ Line velocity

Feeding axisTension detector

Line velocity

Velocity correction

* The velocity correction value is "-" when the tension detection is performed in the downstream side of the feeding axis.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of tension control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0 <= Input the target value of tension [N].

Current value of tension

i_eTensionActVal Single precision real number

Input the value of the tension detector [N].

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [m/ min]

Velocity correction o_eAdditiveVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity correction determined by PID calculation [m/ min]

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of tension control

io_stFeedTensionCtrl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of feed axis io_stFeedAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Sensor position bSensorPos IN Bit On: Downstream side of the feeding axis Off: Upstream side of the feeding axis

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Proportional gain [(m/min)/N]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [m/min]

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [m/min]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Setting of deadband [N]

Amplitude of auto tuning

eMrly IN Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Amplitude at auto turning

Start auto tuning bAtStart IN Bit On: The auto turning is started.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 71

72

Setting of feed axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Auto tuning response wAtResponse IN Word [Signed] 1 to 7 3 1 (Weak) 7(Strong)

Enable auto tuning bAtValEN IN Bit On: The PID control is performed with auto tuning results. Off: The PID control is performed with setting values.

Normal completion of auto tuning

bAtComp OUT Bit On: Turns on when the auto tuning is normally completed. Off: Turn off when Start auto tuning turns off.

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

eTehys OUT Single precision real number

Hysteresis of auto tuning results [N]

Proportional gain of auto tuning results

eAtKp OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Proportional gain of auto tuning results [(m/ min)/N]

Integral time of auto tuning results

eAtTi OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Integral time of auto tuning results [ms]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl (Dancer feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis))

Name CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB detects the position of the dancer roll and controls the velocity to reach the target position.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4371 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

Function description The velocity correction is performed to the line velocity with the PID control output according to a deviation between a target value of dancer and current value of dancer, and the value is output as a command velocity to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. Set the electronic gear of the Simple Motion module for a feeding length per motor rotation of the feed axis calculated with the roll

circumference and reduction ratio.

Execution command

Setting value of dancer

Current value of dancer

Line velocity

Execution cycle

Setting of dancer control

Setting of feed axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Velocity correction

Setting of dancer control

Setting of feed axis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_eAdditiveVelocity :E

io_stFeedDancerCtrl :DUT

io_stFeedAxis :DUT

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDancerSetVal

E: i_eDancerActVal

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: io_stFeedDancerCtrl

DUT: io_stFeedAxis

CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl

PID control

Current value of dancer

Velocity command

Target position value of dancer

+ Line velocity

Feeding axis Line velocity

Velocity correction

* The velocity correction value is "-" when the dancer position detection is performed in the downstream side of the feeding axis.

Dancer roll

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 73

74

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Setting of dancer control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of dancer

i_eDancerSetVal Single precision real number

Input the target position of the dancer roll [mm or degree].

Current value of dancer

i_eDancerActVal Single precision real number

Input the current value of the dancer roll [mm or degree].

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Input the current value of the line velocity [m/ min].

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [m/ min]

Velocity correction o_eAdditiveVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity correction determined by PID calculation [m/ min]

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of dancer control

io_stFeedDancerCtrl WINDER_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of feed axis io_stFeedAxis AXIS_REF

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Sensor position (dancer installation)

wSensorPos IN Bit On: Downstream side of the feeding axis Off: Upstream side of the feeding axis

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Proportional gain [(m/min)/mm or (m/min)/degree]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [m/min]

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [m/min]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0 <= PID control Setting of deadband [mm or degree]

Amplitude of auto tuning

eMrly IN Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Amplitude at auto turning

Start auto tuning bAtStart IN Bit On: The auto turning is started.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Setting of feed axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Auto tuning response wAtResponse IN Word [Signed] 1 to 7 3 1 (Weak) 7(Strong)

Enable auto tuning bAtValEN IN Bit On: The PID control is performed with auto tuning results. Off: The PID control is performed with setting values.

Normal completion of auto tuning

bAtComp OUT Bit On: Turns on when the auto tuning is normally completed. Off: Turn off when Start auto tuning turns off.

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

eTehys OUT Single precision real number

Hysteresis of auto tuning results [mm or degree]

Proportional gain of auto tuning results

eAtKp OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Proportional gain of auto tuning results [(m/ min)/mm or (m/min)/degree]

Integral time of auto tuning results

eAtTi OUT Single precision real number (to be held)

Integral time of auto tuning results [ms]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 75

76

CNV_DrawCtrl (Draw control)

Name CNV_DrawCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB controls the velocity of the intermediate axis in unwinding/rewinding lines.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1342 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The command velocity to the line velocity (draw ratio) at the draw ratio is output to the servo amplifier.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

When combining with the FB that executes in the fixed cycle, Motion calculation cycle event task (I44: Inter-module synchronization) is recommended.

CNV_DrawCtrl

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDrawRatio

E: i_eLineVelocity

DUT: i_stDrawAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

Execution command

Draw ratio

Line velocity

Setting of draw axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Velocity commandDraw ratio

Line axis

Line velocity

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Setting of draw axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Draw ratio i_eDrawRatio Single precision real number

0.0<= Draw ratio (1.0 = Line velocity 100%)

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Line velocity [m/min]

Setting of draw axis i_stDrawAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Draw control Velocity command value [m/min]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 77

78

CNV_LineVelocityGenerator (Line velocity generator)

Name CNV_LineVelocityGenerator

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB controls the velocity of the standard axis (line axis) in unwinding and rewinding lines.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2252 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description When Execution command turns on, the mode of the corresponding axis is changed to the speed mode. (A value other than "0" is set for the axis number setting of the corresponding axis)

The velocity is controlled at the set line velocity when Start velocity control turns on.

* When Axis number is set to "0", only the velocity is generated.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. Although the line velocity setting is always imported, the change to forward or backward cannot be made. If it is changed, control

is performed at the previous line velocity setting. Before changing the line velocity setting to forward or backward, set the line velocity setting to 0.

B: i_bEN

B: i_bVstart

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eAcceleration

E: i_eDeceleration

E: i_eForcedDeceleration

E: i_eJerk

W: i_wDirection

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: i_stLineAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_eAccActVal :E

o_bInVelocity :B

Execution command

Start velocity control

Line velocity

Acceleration

Deceleration

Forced deceleration

Jerk

Direction of rotation

Execution cycle

Setting of line-axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command of line

Current value of acceleration

In velocity

CNV_LineVelocityGenerator

Execution command

Speed modeAmplifier control mode

Start velocity control

200Line velocity setting

Reach to the velocity

100

Acceleration (Jerk)

Deceleration (Jerk)

150

ForcedDeceleration

Position mode

Velocity command of line

200

100

[m/min]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Setting of line axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Start velocity control i_bVstart Bit On: The velocity control is started. Off: The velocity control is stopped.

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Line velocity setting [m/min]

Acceleration i_eAcceleration Single precision real number

0.0 < Acceleration setting [(m/min)/s]

Deceleration i_eDeceleration Single precision real number

0.0 < Deceleration setting [(m/min)/s]

Forced deceleration i_eForcedDeceleration Single precision real number

0.0 < Forced deceleration setting [(m/min)/s]

Jerk i_eJerk Single precision real number

0.0<= Jerk setting [(m/min)/s2]

Direction of rotation i_wDirection Word [Signed] 0.1 0: Forward 1: Backward

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Setting of line-axis i_stLineAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command of line

o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command of line [m/min]

Current value of acceleration

o_eAccActVal Single precision real number

Current value of acceleration [m/s2]

In velocity o_bInVelocity Bit Turns on when the velocity reaches the set velocity.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 79

80

CNV_DiaCalcVelocity (Roll diameter calculation (Velocity ratio method))

Name CNV_DiaCalcVelocity

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the current roll diameter (outer diameter) from the velocity ratio of the winder velocity and line velocity.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 3641 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence STD_Lowpass1 STD_Limiter

Function description The estimate value of the roll diameter is calculated from the ratio of the line velocity and winder velocity, and rapid changes of the roll diameter are prevented with the lowpass filter. When each velocity is slower than the prescribed velocity, updating of the roll diameter stops.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

CNV_DiaCalcVelocity

B: i_bEN

B: i_bSetDia

E: i_eSetDiaVal

B: i_bHoldDia Hold current roll diameter

E: i_eLineVelocity

E: i_eWinderVelocity

DUT: i_stDiaCalcConfig

E: i_eSamplingTime

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eDiaActVal :E

Execution command

Set initial roll diameter

Initial roll diameter value

Line velocity

Velocity of winder axis

Config of roll diameter calculation

Execution cycle

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity Winder velocity

Line velocity

Set initial roll diameter

LPF

Winder velocity

Initial roll diameter value

LPF

Minimum winder velocity Minimum line velocity

Faster than minimum velocity Slower than minimum velocity

0 1

0 1 LPF

Maximum roll diameter

Minimum roll diameter

Hold roll diameter

Current value of roll diameter

Execution of calculation

Stop calculation

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Config of roll diameter calculation (DIA_CALC_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Set initial roll diameter i_bSetDia Bit On: Initial roll diameter Current value of roll diameter Off: Velocity ratio calculation result Current value of roll diameter

Initial roll diameter value

i_eSetDiaVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Initial value of roll diameter [mm] (Minimum roll diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Hold current roll diameter

i_bHoldDia Bit On: The velocity ratio calculation stops. (The current value is held.) Off: Velocity ratio calculation result Current value of roll diameter

Line velocity i_eLineVelocity Single precision real number

Current value of line velocity [m/min]

Velocity of winder axis i_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Current value of winder velocity [r/min]

Config of roll diameter calculation

i_stDiaCalcConfig DIA_CALC_REF Refer to the following.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Maximum roll diameter MaxDia Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Maximum value and minimum value of roll diameter [mm] (0.0 < Minimum diameter < Maximum diameter)

Minimum roll diameter MinDia Single precision real number

Minimum line velocity MinLineVelocity Single precision real number

0.0<= Minimum line velocity for roll diameter calculation [m/min]

Minimum winder velocity

MinWinderVelocity Single precision real number

0.0<= Minimum winder velocity for roll diameter calculation [r/min]

Filter of line velocity LineVelocityLPF Single precision real number

0.0<= Filter time constant of line velocity [ms]

Filter of winder velocity WinderVelocityLPF Single precision real number

0.0<= Filter time constant of winder velocity [ms]

Filter of roll diameter calculation

DiaCalcLPF Single precision real number

0.0<= Filter time constant of roll diameter calculation results [ms]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Current value of roll diameter

o_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

The calculation result of the roll diameter [mm] is stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 81

82

CNV_DiaCalcThickness (Roll diameter calculation (web thickness integration method))

Name CNV_DiaCalcThickness

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the roll diameter from the web thickness and the rotation amount of the winder axis.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2031 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence STD_Limiter

Function description The roll diameter is calculated by adding/subtracting (Web thickness 2) to/from the initial roll diameter for the first rotation. From the second rotation, the roll diameter is calculated by adding/subtracting (Web thickness 2) to/from the current roll diameter every time the winder axis rotates.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

B: i_bSetDia

E: i_eSetDiaVal

B: i_bHoldDia

E: i_eThickness

D: i_dWinderPosActVal

D: i_dAmountOneRev

E: i_eWinderVelocity

DUT: i_stDiaCalcConfig

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eDiaActVal :E

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Set initial roll diameter

Initial roll diameter value

Hold current roll diameter

Web thickness

Current value of winder

Amount per rotation of winder

Velocity of winder axis

W: i_wWinderType Winder type

Config of roll diameter calculation

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Current value of roll diameter

Setting of winder axis

CNV_ DiaCalcThickness

Rewinding: Current roll diameter + Web thickness 2

Unwinding: Current roll diameter - Web thickness 2

Web thickness

Set initial diameter

Detection of one rotation

Initial roll diameter value

Current value of winder

0 1 0

1

Maximum roll diameter

Minimum roll diameter

Hold roll diameter

Current value of roll diameter

Execution of calculation

Winding method

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Config of roll diameter calculation (DIA_CALC_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Set initial roll diameter

i_bSetDia Bit On: Initial roll diameter Current value of roll diameter Off: Cumulative value of web thickness Current value of roll diameter

Initial roll diameter value

i_eSetDiaVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Initial value of roll diameter [mm] (Minimum roll diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Hold current roll diameter

i_bHoldDia Bit On: The cumulative calculation of web thickness stops. (The current value is held.) Off: Cumulative value of web thickness Current value of roll diameter

Winding method i_wWinderType Word [Signed]

0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 45 Rotation Direction Setting".)

Web thickness i_eThickness Single precision real number

0.0 < Web thickness [mm]

Current value of winder

i_dWinderPosActVal Double word [Signed]

Current rotational position of the winder axis (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Amount per rotation of winder

i_dAmountOneRev Double word [Signed]

0 < Travel distance per rotation of winder axis (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Velocity of winder axis

i_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Current value of winder velocity [r/min] (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Config of roll diameter calculation

i_stDiaCalcConfig DIA_CALC_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Maximum roll diameter

MaxDia Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Maximum value and minimum value of roll diameter (0.0 < Minimum diameter < Maximum diameter)

Minimum roll diameter

MinDia Single precision real number

Minimum winder velocity

MinWinderVelocity Single precision real number

0.0<= Minimum winder velocity for roll diameter calculation [r/min]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Current value of roll diameter

o_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

The calculation result of the roll diameter [mm] is stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 83

84

I/O labels

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (Set "0" for using an axis other than the motion control axis.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_DiaCalcFeed (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method))

Name CNV_DiaCalcFeed

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the current roll diameter (outer diameter) from the feeding length of the line axis (main axis) per rotation of the

winder axis.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1550 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence STD_Limiter

Function description This FB measures the perimeter of the roll (circumference) and calculates the current roll diameter (outer diameter) from the feeding length of the line axis per rotation of the winder axis.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

B: i_bSetDia

B: i_bHoldDia

E: i_eSetDiaVal Initial roll diameter value

D: i_dWinderPosActVal Current value of winder

D: i_dAmountOneRev

DUT: io_stLineAxis

E: i_eLineAxisPosActVal Current value of line

DUT: i_stDiaCalcConfig

DUT: io_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eDiaActVal :E

io_stLineAxis :DUT Setting of line axis

io_stWinderAxis :DUT

Execution command

Set initial roll diameter

Hold current roll diameter

Amount per rotation of winder

Setting of line axis

Config of roll diameter calculation

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Current value of roll diameter

Setting of winder axis

CNV_ DiaCalcFeed

|Current value - Previous value|

Set initial diameter Initial roll diameter value

Current value of winder

0 1 0

1

Maximum roll diameter

Minimum roll diameter Hold roll diameter

Execution of calculation

Current value of line /

Variation limiter

Current value of roll diameter

Detection of one rotation

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 85

86

Labels Input labels

Config of roll diameter calculation (DIA_CALC_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

I/O labels

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Set initial roll diameter

i_bSetDia Bit On: Initial roll diameter Current value of roll diameter Off: Feeding length calculation result Current value of roll diameter

Initial roll diameter value

i_eSetDiaVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Initial value of roll diameter [mm] (Minimum roll diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Hold current roll diameter

i_bHoldDia Bit On: The feeding length calculation stops. (The current value is held.) Off: Feeding length calculation result Current value of roll diameter

Current value of winder

i_dWinderPosActVal Double word [Signed]

Current rotational position of the winder axis (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Amount per rotation of winder

i_dAmountOneRev Double word [Signed]

0 < Travel distance per rotation of winder axis (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Current value of line i_eLineAxisPosActV al

Single precision real number

Current value of line axis [mm] (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Config of roll diameter calculation

i_stDiaCalcConfig DIA_CALC_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Maximum roll diameter

MaxDia Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Maximum value and minimum value of roll diameter [mm] (0.0 < Minimum diameter < Maximum diameter)

Minimum roll diameter

MinDia Single precision real number

Variation limit value DiaVariationLimit Single precision real number

0<= 10.0 Variation limit value of operation result per rotation [mm] When "0" is set, the variation limit is disabled.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Current value of roll diameter

o_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

The calculation result of the roll diameter [mm] is stored.

Name Label name Data type Setting range

Description

Setting of winder axis

io_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

Setting of line axis io_stLineAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Setting of axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (Set "0" for using an axis other than the motion control axis.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 87

88

CNV_WinderInertiaTorque (Inertia compensation torque calculation)

Name CNV_WinderInertiaTorque

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the torque compensation value during acceleration/deceleration from the roll value, machine inertia value, and

motor inertia value.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 715 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The following calculation formulas are used to calculate the total inertia and roll angular acceleration, and then the torque of the inertia compensation during acceleration/deceleration.

The units of input values are converted. ([mm] [m], [ms] [s], [mm/s] [m/s]) When the acceleration of the line is positive, the inertia compensation torque is multiplied by the coefficient of accelerating

compensation. When the acceleration of the line is negative, the torque is multiplied by the coefficient of decelerating compensation.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eMaxDia

E: i_eInsideDia

E: i_eWidth

E: i_eDensity

E: i_eJMachine

E: i_eJMotor

E: i_eGearRatio

E: i_eAccActVal

E: i_eAccAdj

E: i_eDecAdj

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eInertiaTrq :E

Execution command

Current value of roll diameter

Maximum roll diameter

Roll inside diameter

Roll width

Roll density

Machine inertia

Motor inertia

Gear ratio

Acceleration of line

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Torque of inertia compensation

CNV_WinderInertiaTorque

Roll weight [kg] = Specific gravity Roll width Current value of roll diameter2 - Roll inside diameter2

4

Roll inertia [kgm2] = Roll weight Current value of roll diameter2 + Roll inside diameter2

8 Gear ratio2

Total inertia [kgm2] = Machine inertia

Gear ratio2 + Roll inertia + Motor inertia

Angular acceleration of roll [rad/s2] = 2 Acceleration of line Gear ratio

Current value of roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation [Nm] = Total inertia Angular acceleration of roll

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Current value of roll-diameter [mm] (Roll inside diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Maximum roll diameter

i_eMaxDia Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Maximum roll diameter [mm] (larger than roll inside diameter)

Roll inside diameter i_eInsideDia Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Roll inside diameter [mm] (0.0 < Roll inside diameter < Maximum roll diameter)

Roll width i_eWidth Single precision real number

0.0<= Roll width [mm]

Roll density i_eDensity Single precision real number

0.0<= Roll density [kg/m3]

Machine inertia i_eJMachine Single precision real number

0.0<= Machine inertia [kgm2]

Motor inertia i_eJMotor Single precision real number

0.0<= Motor inertia [kgm2]

Gear ratio i_eGearRatio Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Acceleration of line i_eAccActVal Single precision real number

Acceleration of line [m/s2]

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

i_eAccAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in acceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

i_eDecAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in deceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Torque of inertia compensation

o_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Calculation results of inertia compensation torque [Nm] are stored. (Motor axis conversion)

Item Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 89

90

CNV_InertiaCalc (Load inertia ratio calculation)

Name CNV_InertiaCalc

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the load inertia ratio of the current value of the roll diameter to the winder motor axis.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 453 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description With the load inertia ratio of each of the minimum/maximum diameters, the load inertia ratio to the current value of the roll diameter is calculated based on the following graph (Quartic function). The calculated load inertia ratio current value can be used as the input of the inertia compensation torque calculation (motor inertia ratio) FB.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eMinDia

E: i_eMinGD2

E: i_eMaxDia

E: i_eMaxGD2

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eGD2ActVal:E

Execution command

Current value of roll diameter

Minimum roll diameter

Minimum load inertia ratio

Maximum roll diameter

Maximum load inertia ratio

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Current value of load inertia ratio

CNV_InertiaCalc

Load inertia ratio

Roll diameter MinDia MaxDia

MinGD2

MaxGD2

Current value of roll diameter

GD2 current value

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Current value of roll-diameter [mm] (Minimum roll diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Minimum roll diameter

i_eMinDia Single precision real number

0.0 < Minimum value of roll diameter (= Winder axis diameter) [mm]

Minimum load inertia ratio

i_eMinGD2 Single precision real number

0.0 < Load inertia ratio without rolls [Multiplier] (Motor side/load side)

Maximum roll diameter

i_eMaxDia Single precision real number

i_eMinDia < Maximum roll diameter [mm]

Maximum load inertia ratio

i_eMaxGD2 Single precision real number

i_eMinGD2 < Load inertia ratio of maximum roll diameter [Multiplier] (Motor side/load side)

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Current value of load inertia ratio

o_eGD2ActVal Single precision real number

The calculation results of load inertia ratio [Multiplier] is stored (Motor side/load side).

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 91

92

CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTorque (Inertia compensation torque calculation (Motor inertia ratio))

Name CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTorque

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the torque of inertia compensation in acceleration/deceleration with the total inertia value calculated from the

velocity of the winder axis and the ratio of load inertia moment.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 451 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The acceleration is calculated from the velocity of the winder axis, and the torque of inertia compensation in acceleration/ deceleration is calculated using the following formula.

When the acceleration of the line is positive, the inertia compensation torque is multiplied by the coefficient of accelerating compensation. When the acceleration of the line is negative, the torque is multiplied by the coefficient of decelerating compensation. The output of the load inertia ratio calculation FB can be used for the input of the load inertia moment ratio.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eWinderVelocity

E: i_eGD2

E: i_eAccAdj

E: i_eDecAdj

E: i_eMotorInertia

E: i_eSamplingTime

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eInertiaTrq:E

Execution command

Velocity of winder axis

Ratio of load inertia moment

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

Motor inertia

Execution cycle

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Torque of inertia compensation

CNV_ WinderInertiaRatioTorque

Torque of inertia compensation = (1.0 + Ratio of load inertia moment) Motor inertia Angular acceleration of roll

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Velocity of winder axis

i_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Motor velocity of the winder axis [r/min]

Ratio of load inertia moment

i_eGD2 Single precision real number

0.0 < Current value of the ratio of load inertia moment [Multiplier] (Motor side/load side)

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

i_eAccAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in acceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

i_eDecAdj Single precision real number

0.0<= 1.0 Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in deceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Motor inertia i_eMotorInertia Single precision real number

0.0 < Motor inertia [kgm2]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Torque of inertia compensation

o_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Calculation results of inertia compensation torque [Nm] are stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 93

94

CNV_InertiaEstimation (Inertia estimation)

Name CNV_InertiaEstimation

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB estimates the inertia value from acceleration of axis and motor current value by vibrating the winder axis.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2448 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The winder axis is accelerated and decelerated with maximum velocity (i_eMaxVelocity) and 10% of the maximum velocity five times to estimate the inertia value of the winder axis from the motor torque value. The estimated inertia value can be used as the input of inertia compensation torque calculation (inertia estimation value) FB.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. When the acceleration/deceleration torque is low, the accuracy of the inertia estimation value decreases. (Reference: 5% or more)

B: i_bEN

E: i_eMaxVelocity

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: i_stWinderControl

DUT: i_stWinderAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

Execution command

Maximum velocity

Execution cycle

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder axis

Executing

Operating

Error completion

Error code

Inertia estimation value

CNV_InertiaEstimation

o_eJest :E

o_bComp :B Normal completion

[Operation timing]

Velocity of winder axis [r/min]

10% of maximum velocity

a i_eMaxVelocity

(Maximum velocity)

10s

i_bEN (Execution command)

Unidentified Estimate o_eJest (Inertia estimation value)

[kgm2]

o_bComp (Normal completion)

o_bOK (Operating)

2s

a = 0.5sa a a

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit ON, OFF On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Maximum velocity i_eMaxVelocity Single precision real number

0.0 < Maximum velocity [r/min] when the winder axis is vibrated

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB (Use with the value of 30.0 ms or less.)

Setting of winder control

i_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the setting of winder control.

Setting of winder axis

i_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the setting of winder axis.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Gear ratio eWinderGearRatio IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Rated torque eWinderRatedTrq IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Rotation direction selection

uAmpPol IN Word [Unsigned]

0, 1 0 Set the same value as the parameter PA14 (POL) of the servo amplifier. When the value other than 1 is set, the operation is performed regarding the value as 0.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

1 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Operating o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Normal completion o_bComp Bit This device turns on when the inertia estimation is completed. This device turns off when Execution command (i_bEN) turns off.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Inertia estimation value

o_eJest Single precision real number

Inertia value [kgm2] of the winder axis estimated from motor acceleration at vibration and current value.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 95

96

CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc (Inertia compensation torque calculation (Inertia estimation value))

Name CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the inertia value and inertia compensation torque for the current value of the roll diameter from the inertia value

of the maximum roll diameter and minimum roll diameter.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 756 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description From the inertia of the minimum diameter and maximum diameter, the inertia of the current value of the roll diameter is calculated based on the following graph (Quartic function) and the inertia compensation torque is calculated for the acceleration and gear ratio. For the input of minimum inertia and maximum inertia, the output of inertia estimation FB can be used.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eMinDia

E: i_eMinInertia

E: i_eMaxDia

E: i_eMaxInertia

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eInertiaActVal :E

Execution command

Current value of roll diameter

Minimum roll diameter

Minimum inertia

Maximum roll diameter

Maximum inertia

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Current value of inertia

CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc

Acceleration of line

Gear ratio

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

E: i_eAccActVal

E: i_eGearRatio

E: i_eAccAdj

E: i_eDecAdj

o_eInertiaTrq :E Torque of inertia compensation

Inertia

Roll diameterMinimum roll diameter

Minimum inertia

Maximum inertia

Current value of roll diameter

Current value of inertia

Maximum roll diameter

Torque of inertia compensation [Nm] = 2 Current value of inertia Acceleration of line Gear ratio

Current value of roll diameter

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

Refer to the right description.

Current value of roll-diameter [mm] (Minimum roll diameter to maximum roll diameter)

Minimum roll diameter

i_eMinDia Single precision real number

0.0 < Minimum value of roll diameter (= Winder axis diameter) [mm]

Minimum inertia i_eMinInertia Single precision real number

0.0 < Inertia [kgm2] without roll

Maximum roll diameter

i_eMaxDia Single precision real number

i_eMinDia < Maximum roll diameter [mm]

Maximum inertia i_eMaxInertia Single precision real number

i_eMinInertia < Inertia [kgm2] of maximum roll diameter

Acceleration of line i_eAccActVal Single precision real number

Acceleration of line [m/s2]

Gear ratio i_eGearRatio Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Coefficient of accelerating compensation

i_eAccAdj Single precision real number

0.0 <= Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in acceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Coefficient of decelerating compensation

i_eDecAdj Single precision real number

0.0 <= Compensation coefficient of inertia compensation torque in deceleration [1.0 = 100%]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Current value of inertia

o_eInertiaActVal Single precision real number

Operation results of inertia value [kgm2] are stored.

Torque of inertia compensation

o_eInertiaTrq Single precision real number

Calculation results of inertia compensation torque [Nm] are stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 97

98

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque (Friction compensation torque calculation)

Name CNV_WinderFrictionTorque

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the torque of friction compensation.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 613 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description (1) Calculation method: When i_bTableType is off The friction torque is calculated based on the set values of the coulomb friction and the coefficient of viscous friction.

* When either one of the values of the friction coefficient and coulomb friction torque is unclear, set with the actual measured value of the motor torque of the winder axis (without rolls).

(2) Data table method: When i_wTableType is on The friction torque is calculated with the setting data table.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Since the FBs of Ver1.001B or earlier and Ver1.002C or later have different friction torque table structures, the old data table cannot be used after the version is updated from Ver1.001B or earlier to Ver1.002C or later. When updating the version, change the data type of the label used for the friction torque table (XY_TABLE_REF FRIC_TABLE_REF) or create a new label.

When creating a data table with the friction torque measurement FB, use the versions in the following combinations. This FB Ver1.001B or earlier [CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement] Ver1.004E or earlier This FB Ver1.002C or later [CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement] Ver1.005F or later

B: i_bEN

E: i_eWinderVelocity

E: i_eCoulombTorque

E: i_eViscousCoef

B: i_bTableType

DUT: i_stFrictionTrqTbl

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eFrictionTrq :E

Execution command

Velocity of winder axis

Friction torque of coulomb

Coefficient of viscous friction

Method of table type

Table of friction torque

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Torque of friction compensation

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque

Winder velocity Friction coefficient + Friction torque of coulomb

Friction torque of coulomb

Velocity

Torque

a

b Actual measured value of motor torque

Friction coefficient = a b

A coefficient is calculated from the inclination of the torque based on the actual measured value. (If the inclination of the torque is not a straight line, calculate a coefficient using the table interpolation FB, etc.)

Velocity [r/min]

Friction torque [Nm]

x1 x2 x3 x4 x5

y1 y2 y3 y4

y5

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Table of friction torque (FRIC_TABLE_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Velocity of winder axis

i_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity of winder axis [r/min]

Friction torque of coulomb

i_eCoulombTorque Single precision real number

0.0<= Friction torque of coulomb [Nm]

Coefficient of viscous friction

i_eViscousCoef Single precision real number

0.0<= Coefficient of viscous friction [1.0 = 100%]

Method of table type i_bTableType Bit On: Table type Off: Calculation method

Table of friction torque

i_stFrictionTrqTbl FRIC_TABLE_ REF

Refer to the following.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Number of points NumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 50 Number of points

Winder velocity (X-coordinate)

eWinderVelocity [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate [r/min]

eWinderVelocity [1] Single precision real number

eWinderVelocity [0] < Second point in the X-coordinate [r/ min]

Single precision real number

eWinderVelocity [NumPoint-1]

Single precision real number

eWinderVelocity [NumPoint-2] <

nth point in the X-coordinate [r/min]

Friction torque (Y-coordinate)

eFrictionTrq [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

eFrictionTrq [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

Single precision real number

eFrictionTrq [NumPoint-1]

Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 99

10

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Torque of friction compensation

o_eFrictionTrq Single precision real number

Calculation results of torque of friction compensation [Nm] are stored.

0 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Friction torque measurement)

Name CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB measures the friction torque.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2138 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The friction torque is measured for the number of measurement points between 0 to the maximum velocity.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

B: i_bEN

E: i_eNumPoint

E: i_eMeasureTime

E: i_eAcceleration

E: i_eMaxVelocity

E: i_eTrqActVal

E: i_eMotorRatedTrq

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: i_stAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bComp :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_stFrictionTrqTbl :DUT

Execution command

Number of measurement points

Measurement time

Acceleration

Maximum velocity

Actual torque value

Rated torque

Execution cycle

Setting of axis

Executing

Normal operation

Normal completion

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Table of friction torque

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement

Velocity [r/min]

Torque [Nm]

Actual measured value of motor torque

The machine accelerates by (Maximum velocity/Number of measurement points). This FB stops when the torque value is measured (average value of the measurement time (k)) and the friction torque is measured at the maximum velocity.

Actual torque value

Velocity command

Friction torque measurement Measurement result

Maximum velocity

0

0

k k k k k

x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 y1 y2 y3 y4

y5

i_bEN (Execution command)

o_bOK (Normal operation)

o_bErr (Error completion)

o_uErrID (Error code) 0 Error code

o_bComp (Normal completion)

0

Measurement operation

[Measurement timing]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 101

10

Labels Input labels

Setting of measurement axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle. Since the FBs of Ver1.004E or earlier and Ver1.005F or later have different friction torque table structures, the old data table

cannot be used after the version is updated from Ver1.004E or earlier to Ver1.005F or later. When updating the version, change the data type of the label used for the friction torque table (XY_TABLE_REF FRIC_TABLE_REF) or create a new label.

When using the friction torque table of this FB in the friction compensation torque calculation FB, use the versions in the following combinations.

This FB Ver1.004E or earlier [CNV_ WinderFrictionTorque] Ver1.001B or earlier This FB Ver1.005F or later [CNV_ WinderFrictionTorque] Ver1.002C or later

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Number of measurement points

i_eNumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 50 Number of velocity measurement points

Measurement time i_eMeasureTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Constant time at each velocity measurement point [ms]

When the time shorter than the execution cycle is set, the time is measured in the execution cycle.

Acceleration i_eAcceleration Single precision real number

0.0 < Acceleration at measurement operation [(r/ min)/s]

Maximum velocity i_eMaxVelocity Single precision real number

0.0 < Maximum velocity at measurement operation [r/min]

Actual torque value i_eTrqActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Current value of motor torque [Nm] (Input a value only when the axis number is 0.)

Rated torque i_eMotorRatedTrq Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Setting of axis i_stAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned]

0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned]

0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Item Description

2 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Output labels

Table of friction torque (FRIC_TABLE_REF structure)

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Normal completion o_bComp Bit This device turns on when the measurement is normally completed. This device turns off when Execution command (i_bEN) turns off.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command [r/min] at measurement operation

Table of friction torque

o_stFrictionTrqTbl FRIC_TABLE_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Number of points NumPoint Single precision real number

Number of points

Winder velocity (X-coordinate)

eWinderVelocity [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate [r/min]

eWinderVelocity [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the X-coordinate [r/min]

eWinderVelocity [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the X-coordinate [r/min]

Friction torque (Y-coordinate)

eFrictionTrq [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

eFrictionTrq [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

eFrictionTrq [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate [Nm]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 103

10

CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement (Tension deviation measurement)

Name CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB creates the tension correction data table to correct the deviations (difference of the setting value and current value) due to

mechanical loss of free roll at line operation. The difference between the tension setting value and tension current value is calculated with each velocity for the set number of measuring points from 0 to maximum line velocity, and the data table of tension correction value for each speed is created.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 454 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

B: i_bEN

E: i_eNumPoint

E: i eMeasureTime

E: i_eMaxVelocity

E: i_eTensionSetVal

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_stTensionAdjTbl :DUT

Execution command

Number of measuring points

Measurement time

Maximum velocity

Setting value of tension

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Tension correction value table

CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement

E: i_eTensionActVal Current value of tension

B: i_bInSetVelocity Reach velocity command

E: i_eSamplingTimeExecution cycle

o_bComp :B Normal completion

4 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Function description The tension deviations (setting value and current value) due to mechanical loss of free roller at line operation can be measured. When the execution command is turned on with each parameter set in the input labels, the command velocity, which accelerates from 0 to (maximum line velocity number of measuring points), is output, the difference of the tension setting value and tension current value is measured (calculating the average value of measurement time) with each measuring point, and is output as tension correction value table. The output tension correction value table can be used as input of the tension correction value for tension sensorless torque control FB by combining with the table interpolation FB. During the deviation measurement (while this FB is operating), set the input label i_eTensionAdjVal (Tension correction value) of the tension sensorless torque FB which operates the winder axis to 0. When the execution command is turned off during the measurement, the number of points measured until the measurement is stopped and completed, and the table is output. Measurement operation example When the operation is performed with the following settings: i_eNumPoint (Number of measuring points): 5 [points] i_eMaxVelocity (Maximum line velocity): 100 [m/min] i_eMeasureTime (Measurement time): 500 [ms] i_eTensionSetVal (Tension setting value): 10 [N]

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Item Description

[Measurement timing]

20 40 60 80 100 00

i_bEN (Execution command) o_eCommandVelocity

(Measuring velocity command [m/min])

(Line velocity [m/min])

i_bInSetVelocity (Reach velocity command)

t t t t t

100 80 60 40 20 0

11.2 10.7 10.5 9.8 9.5

i_eTensionActVal (Current value of tension [N])

10.0

o_bComp (Normal completion)

t: 500 [ms]

o_bOK (Normal operation)

i_eTensionSetVal (Setting value of tension [N])

Measurement result

o_stTensionAdjTbl (Tension correction value table)

NumPoint 5

eTableX (Line velocity)

eTableY (Tension

correction value)

20.0

40.0

60.0

80.0

100.0

0.5

0.2

-0.5

-0.7

-1.2

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 105

10

How to use The following shows the program example to compensate the tension deviation at the operation using the tension sensorless torque control FB and tension sensor feedback torque control FB. Add the following circuit for measurement and tension correction surrounded by dashed lines to the program which controls the normal line operation (production operation). (Arrange the FB to the program executed in a fixed cycle.) Calculate the tension deviation (difference of setting value and current value) with "Measuring operation start", and create "Tension correction value table". To improve the accuracy of tension, calculate the tension correction value for the line speed with table compensation (50 points) FB and use it as the tension correction value of the tension sensorless torque control FB or tension sensor feedback torque control FB. In the following example, the output of table compensation FB (50 points) is input to the tension correction value of the tension sensorless torque control FB to set the tension correction value to 0 during measuring operation.

CNV_WinderVelocityCtrl

Line velocity generator FB

i_eLineVelocity

o_eCommandVelocity

o_bInVelocity

CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement Tension deviation measurement FB

i_eTensionSetVal o_eCommandVelocity

o_stTensionAdjTbli_eTensionActVal

Winder axis

Tension detector Line axis

CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl Tension sensorless torque control FB

o_eCommandTorque

i_bInSetVelocity

Free roller

i_eTensionSetVal

Data selection

Start production operation

i_bEN

Current value of tension [N]

Torque command

Velocity setting value for measurement

G

IN0

IN1

Velocity command

Production speed setting value

i_bEN

Measurement operation start

Start production operation

Measurement operation start

i_bEN

Measurement operation start

Setting value of tension [N]

Measurement operation start

Reach to the velocity

Table interpolation FB (50 points) STD_Table50

i_eX

i_stTbl

i_bEN

Velocity command o_eY Tension correction table

i_eDiaActVal

i_eTensionAdjVal

Tension correction value [N]

Current value of roll diameter

Tension correction value [N]

Setting value of tension [N]

Line velocity setting value

SEL

o_bComp

Measurement operation start

R Start production

operation

6 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit ON, OFF On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Number of measuring points

i_eNumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 50 0 to number of velocity measuring points at maximum line velocity

Measurement time i_eMeasureTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Measurement time at each velocity point [ms]

When the time shorter than the execution cycle is set, the time is measured in the execution cycle.

Maximum velocity i_eMaxVelocity Single precision real number

0.0 < Measuring maximum line velocity [m/min]

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionSetVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Setting value of tension [N]

Current value of tension

i_eTensionActVal Single precision real number

Current value of tension [N]

Reach velocity command

i_bInSetVelocity Bit ON, OFF Turn on when the actual line velocity reaches each measuring point. The measurement is started after this input is turned on. The average value of the sampled value with measurement time is stored to the data table.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < The execution cycle of the FB is input. Fixed cycle interval time of fixed cycle program or inter-module synchronization is specified [ms].

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Normal completion o_bComp Bit This device turns on when the measurement is normally completed. This device turns off when Execution command (i_bEN) turns off.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Measuring command velocity [m/min]

Tension correction value table

o_stTensionAdjTbl XY_TABLE50_REF Velocity [r/min] and tension correction value [N] with it (Refer to XY_TABLE50_REF.)

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 107

10

Tension correction value table (XY_TABLE50_REF structure)

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Number of measuring points

NumPoint Single precision real number

Number of measuring points

Line velocity (X-coordinate)

eTableX [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate [m/min]

eTableX [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the X-coordinate [m/min]

eTableX [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the X-coordinate [m/min]

Tension correction value (Y-coordinate)

eTableY [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate [N]

eTableY [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate [N]

eTableY [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate [N]

8 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_WinderGainChange (Gain change)

Name CNV_WinderGainChange

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the velocity gain value in response to the ratio of load inertia moment.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 385 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The velocity control gain is adjusted at the maximum inertia, and GD2nom and VG2nom at that time are used as the input values. The velocity gain factor is set to 0 by default. When the response speed is low, gradually increase the value of . VG2 is calculated using the load inertia moment ratio (GD2) as the input value and used as the output value.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

E: i_eGD2

E: i_eGD2nom

E: i_eVG2nom

E: i_eAlpha

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eGD2out :E

o_eVG2out :E

Execution command

Ratio of load inertia moment (GD2)

GD2 in maximum inertia

VG2 in maximum inertia

Velocity gain factor ()

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output of GD2

Output of VG2

CNV_WinderGainChange

VG2 = (1 ) VG2nom + VG2nom 1 + GD2nom

1 + GD2

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 109

11

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Ratio of load inertia moment

i_eGD2 Single precision real number

0.0 < Current inertia ratio [Multiplier] (Motor side/ load side)

GD2 in maximum inertia

i_eGD2nom Single precision real number

0.0 < Inertia ratio in maximum inertia (Maximum roll diameter) [Multiplier] (Motor side/load side)

VG2 in maximum inertia

i_eVG2nom Single precision real number

0.0 < Velocity control gain in maximum inertia (Maximum roll diameter) [rad/s]

Velocity gain factor i_eAlpha Single precision real number

0 to 1.0 Response coefficient

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output of GD2 o_eGD2out Single precision real number

Current inertia ratio [Multiplier] (Motor side/load side)

Output of VG2 o_eVG2out Single precision real number

Calculation results of proper VG2 [rad/s]

0 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_TaperTension (Taper tension calculation)

Name CNV_TaperTension

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the coefficient of taper tension in response to the roll diameter.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1715 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence STD_TableInterpolation

Function description No taper (TaperMode: 0)

Linear taper characteristic (TaperMode: 1)

B: i_bEN

UW: i_uTaperMode

E: i_eDiaActVal

E: i_eUpperLimit

E: i_eLowerLimit

E: i_eTaperRatio

E: i_eStartDia

E: i_eMaxDia

DUT: i_stTaperTabl

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eTensionTaper :E

Execution command

Taper mode

Current value of roll diameter

Taper maximum value

Taper minimum value

Taper ratio

Start diameter of roll

Maximum roll diameter

Table of taper setting

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Coefficient of taper tension

CNV_TaperTension

Start diameter of roll Maximum roll diameter

1.0

Taper tension

Current value of roll diameter

Taper ratio

Start diameter of roll Maximum roll diameter

1.0

Taper tension

Current value of roll diameter

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 111

11

Function description Hyperbolic taper characteristic 1 (TaperMode: 2)

Hyperbolic taper characteristic 2 (TaperMode: 3)

Data table characteristic (TaperMode: 4)

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

For the data table characteristic, set the current values of the roll diameter (X-coordinate) in ascending order and 2000 or less points.

Item Description

Taper ratio

Start diameter of roll Maximum roll diameter

1.0

Taper tension

Current value of roll diameter

Taper ratio

Start diameter of roll Maximum roll diameter

1.0

Taper tension

Current value of roll diameter

1.0

Taper tension

X1

Current value of roll diameter

X2 X3 X4 X6

Y1

Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6

X5

2 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Table of taper setting (XY_TABLE_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Taper mode i_uTaperMode Word [Unsigned] 0 to 4 0: No taper 1: Linear taper characteristic 2: Hyperbolic taper characteristic 1 3: Hyperbolic taper characteristic 2 4: Data table characteristic

Current value of roll diameter

i_eDiaActVal Single precision real number

0.0 < Current value of roll-diameter [mm]

Taper maximum value i_eUpperLimit Single precision real number

Minimum value to 1.0 Taper maximum value [1.0 = 100%]

Taper minimum value i_eLowerLimit Single precision real number

0.0 to Maximum value Taper minimum value [1.0 = 100%]

Taper ratio i_eTaperRatio Single precision real number

0.0 to 1.0 Taper ratio [1.0 = 100%]

Start diameter of roll i_eStartDia Single precision real number

0.0 < Start diameter of roll [mm]

Maximum roll diameter i_eMaxDia Single precision real number

Start diameter of roll < Maximum roll diameter [mm]

Table of taper setting i_stTaperTabl XY_TABLE_REF Refer to the following.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Number of points NumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 2000 Number of points

Roll diameter (X- coordinate)

eTableX [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate [mm]

eTableX [1] Single precision real number

eTableX [0] < Second point in the X-coordinate [mm]

Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint- 1]

Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint-2] < nth point in the X-coordinate [mm]

Taper ratio (Y- coordinate)

eTableY [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate [1.0 = 100%]

eTableY [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate [1.0 = 100%]

Single precision real number

eTableY [NumPoint- 1]

Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate [1.0 = 100%]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 113

11

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Coefficient of taper tension

o_eTensionTaper Single precision real number

The coefficient of taper tension is stored. [1.0 = 100%]

4 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_PIDControl (PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning))

Name CNV_PIDControl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB executes the PID control.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1479 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

B: i_bEN

B: i_bIntFreeze

B: i_bIntInit

B: i_bPRelease

B: i_bIRelease

B: i_bDRelease

E: i_eKp

E: i_eTi

E: i_eTd

E: i_eActVal

E: i_eSetVal

E: i_eDeadBand

E: i_eHighLimit

E: i_eLowLimit

E: i_eMrly

B: i_bAtStart

W: i_wAtResponse

B: i_bAtValEN

E: i_eSamplingTime

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutput :E

o_bAtComp :B

o_eAtKp :E

o_eTehys :E Hysteresis of auto tuning results

o_eAtTi :E

Execution command

Hold integral variable

Initialize integral variable

Enable proportionality

Enable integration

Enable differential

proportionality gain

Integral time

Differential time

Actual current value

Target value

Setting of deadband

Output upper limit

Output lower limit

Amplitude of auto tuning

Start auto tuning

Auto tuning response

Enable auto tuning

Execution cycle

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output PID

Normal completion of auto tuning

proportionality gain of auto tuning results

Integral time of auto tuning results

CNV_PIDControl

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 115

11

Labels Input labels

Function description

The PID control shown in the following block diagram is executed.

[Timing to perform auto tuning on the PI control gain]

1) Turning on i_bAtStart (start auto tuning) stops the PID control and calculates the hysteresis width from the noise size of i_eActVal (actual current value). 2) e_Output (output PID) gradually increases so that the amplitude of i_eActVal (actual current value) is equal to i_eMrly (amplitude setting value). 3) Oscillation is generated with the amplitude of i_eMrly (amplitude setting value) and a proper Kp (proportionality gain) and Ti (integral time) are calculated. 4) o_bAtComp (normal completion of auto tuning) turns on and the PID control is restarted with the gain value of auto tuning results. Turning off i_bAtStart (start auto tuning) turns off o_bAtComp (normal completion of auto tuning).

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Hold integral variable

i_bIntFreeze Bit On: The manipulated amount in the integral control is held.

Initialize integral variable

i_bIntInit Bit Off: The manipulated amount in the integral control is reset.

Enable proportionality

i_bPRelease Bit On: The proportional control is enabled.

Enable integration i_bIRelease Bit On: The integral control is enabled.

Enable differential i_bDRelease Bit On: The differential control is enabled.

Item Description

+ Target value

- +

+

Ts Ti

z-1

+ Td Ts

-

Kp

Output value+

+ +

Kp

Kp PI gain auto tuning

Auto Tuning

z-1

Setting of deadband

Output limiter

Actual current value

i_bAtStart (Start auto tuning)

o_bAtComp (Normal completion of auto tuning)

Gain value before tuning Gain value after auto tuning Kp (Proportionality gain)

Ti (Integral time)

i_eActVal (Actual current value)

o_eOutput (Output PID) Hysteresis

1) 2) 3) 4)

Target value Amplitude

Amplitude

6 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Proportionality gain i_eKp Single precision real number

0.0<= Proportionality gain

Integral time i_eTi Single precision real number

0.0<= Integral time [ms]

Differential time i_eTd Single precision real number

0.0<= Differential time [ms]

Actual current value i_eActVal Single precision real number

Actual current value

Target value i_eSetVal Single precision real number

Target value

Setting of deadband i_eDeadBand Single precision real number

0.0<= Setting of deadband

Output upper limit i_eHighLimit Single precision real number

Output lower limit <

Output upper limit

Output lower limit i_eLowLimit Single precision real number

Output upper limit >

Output lower limit

Amplitude of auto tuning

i_eMrly Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Amplitude at auto turning

Start auto tuning i_bAtStart Bit On: The auto turning is started.

Auto tuning response

i_wAtResponse Word [Signed] 1 to 7 3 1 (Weak) 7(Strong)

Enable auto tuning i_bAtValEN Bit On: The PID control is performed with auto tuning results. Off: The PID control is performed with setting values.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output PID o_eOutput Single precision real number

The output value of PID control is stored.

Normal completion of auto tuning

o_bAtComp Bit On: Turns on when the auto tuning is normally completed. Off: Turn off when Start auto tuning turns off.

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results

o_eAtKp Single precision real number

Proportionality gain of auto tuning results

Integral time Auto tuning results

o_eAtTi Single precision real number

Integral time of auto tuning results [ms]

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

o_eTehys Single precision real number

Hysteresis of auto tuning results

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 117

11

CNV_EdgePositionCtrl (Edge position control)

Name CNV_EdgePositionCtrl

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB detects the position of the edge sensor and controls the velocity to reach the target position.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 4643 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence CNV_PIDControl

Function description This FB calculates the velocity for the position correction with the PID control so that an edge position of a web material will be the intermediate value (target value) of the edge sensor, and outputs the velocity as a velocity command in the speed mode to the servo amplifier.

*1 To correct the position according to a roller angle of the intermediate axis, set the electric gear unit setting to "0:mm". (Example) Rotating 45 degree per rotation of the motor (4194304 pulse) Pr.2:No. of pulse per rotation: 4194304 pulse, Pr.3:Movement amount per rotation: 45000.0 m

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eEdgeSensorSetVal

E: i_eEdgeSensorActVal

E: i_eFwdLimitVal

E: i_eRevLimitVal

E: i_eSamplingTime

DUT: i_stEdgePosCtrl

DUT: i_stEdgePosAxis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_bFwdLimit :B Forward end

o_eCommandVelocity :E

o_bRevLimit :B

Execution command

Setting value of edge sensor

Current value of edge sensor

Forward end setting

Recession end setting

Execution cycle

Setting of edge position control

Setting of edge position axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Velocity command

Recession end

CNV_EdgePositionCtrl

PID control Setting value of edge sensor

Velocity commandCurrent value of edge sensor

When the unwinder axis moves (The edge sensor position is fixed.)

Edge sensor

When the rewinder axis moves (The edge sensor follows the rewinder axis.)

Edge sensor

OK NG

Forward end setting

Recession end setting

0

Within the range

Current position

Edge sensor

When the intermediate axis moves*1

8 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

Setting of edge position control (EdgePos_REF structure)

Setting of edge position axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Setting value of edge sensor

i_eEdgeSensorSetV al

Single precision real number

Input the target position of the edge sensor [mm].

Current value of edge sensor

i_eEdgeSensorActV al

Single precision real number

Input the current value of the edge sensor [mm].

Forward end setting i_eFwdLimitVal Single precision real number

Recession end <

Edge position Forward end position [mm] The velocity control in the + direction stops.

Recession end setting

i_eRevLimitVal Single precision real number

Forward end >

Edge position Recession end position [mm] The velocity control in the - direction stops.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Setting of edge position control

i_stEdgePosCtrl EdgePos_REF Refer to Setting of edge position control.

Setting of edge position axis

i_stEdgePosAxis AXIS_REF Refer to Setting of edge position axis.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Direction of operation bDirection IN Bit Off: Sensor value+ Command velocity- On: Sensor value+ Command velocity+

Proportionality gain eKp IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Proportionality gain [(mm/s)/mm]

Integral time eTi IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Integral time [ms]

Differential time eTd IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Differential time [ms]

Upper limit ePidUpperLimit IN Single precision real number

Lower limit value <

PID output Upper limit value [mm/s]

Lower limit ePidLowerLimit IN Single precision real number

Upper limit value >

PID output Lower limit value [mm/s]

Setting of deadband ePidDeadBand IN Single precision real number

0.0<= PID control Setting of deadband [mm]

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 0 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number (0: Only the command operation. The Simple Motion module does not send output to the servo amplifier.)

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 119

12

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Velocity command o_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

Velocity command value of FB calculation results [mm/s]

Forward end o_bFwdLimit Bit The edge position axis is at the forward end.

Recession end o_bRevLimit Bit The edge position axis is at the recession end.

0 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_WebBreakDetect (Web break detection)

Name CNV_WebBreakDetect

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB detects a web break.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 590 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTensionActVal

E: i_eTensionUpperLimit

E: i_eTensionLowerLimit

B: i_bWebBreakReset

E: i_eTensionCmdVal

E: i_eDeviationUpperLimit

E: i_eSamplingTimeExecution cycle

E: i_eWebAlarmDelayTimeAlarm delay time

E: i_eWebAlarmHysAlarm return hysteresis

E: i_eDeviationLowerLimit

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_bWebAlarm :B Web alarm signal

o_bWebBreak :B

Execution command

Current value of tension

Tension upper limit

Tension lower limit

Web break signal reset

Setting value of tension

Deviation upper limit

Deviation lower limit

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Web break signal

CNV_WebBreakDetect

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 121

12

*1 For the dancer control or tension sensorless torque control, the current value of dancer or motor torque value can be used as a tension detection value.

Function description This FB detects a web break using the upper/lower limit values provided for the tension detection value*1. Web break detection: Turns on when the tension detection value is equal to or larger than the upper limit value or equal to or

smaller than the lower limit value, and turns off when Web break reset signal is input after the tension detection value becomes normal.

Web alarm signal: Turns on when the tension deviation is equal to or larger than the upper limit value or equal to or smaller than the lower limit value after the alarm delay time has elapsed, and turns off when the tension deviation is equal to or smaller than "Upper limit value - Hysteresis value" or equal to or larger than "Lower limit value + Hysteresis value".

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Control type Tension detection value Tension command value Tension sensor feedback velocity control Current value of tension Setting value of tension Coefficient of tension

Dancer feedback velocity control Current value of dancer Setting value of dancer

Tension sensor feedback torque control Current value of tension Setting value of tension Coefficient of tension

Tension sensorless torque control Motor torque value Torque command value

Item Description

[Detection timing]

Web break signal

Web alarm signal

Web break signal reset

t: Alarm delay time

t

Tension upper limit

Tension lower limit

Deviation lower limit

Deviation upper limit Setting value of tension

Deviation upper limit - Hysteresis

Current value of tension

Deviation lower limit + Hysteresis

Execution command

t t

2 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Current value of tension

i_eTensionActVal Single precision real number

Input the value of the tension detector [N].

Tension upper limit i_eTensionUpperLi mit

Single precision real number

Tension lower limit <

Tension upper limit value for web break detection [N]

Tension lower limit i_eTensionLowerLi mit

Single precision real number

Tension upper limit >

Tension lower limit value for web break detection [N]

Web break signal reset

i_bWebBreakReset Bit Resets a web break output.

Setting value of tension

i_eTensionCmdVal Single precision real number

Input the tension (detection target) command value [N].

Deviation upper limit

i_eDeviationUpperL imit

Single precision real number

Deviation lower limit <

Upper limit value of deviation (Current value - Command value) for web alarm [N]

Deviation lower limit i_eDeviationLowerL imit

Single precision real number

Deviation upper limit >

Lower limit value of deviation (Current value - Command value) for web alarm [N]

Alarm return hysteresis

i_eWebAlarmHys Single precision real number

0.0 Hysteresis width at detection of a web alarm signal [N]

Alarm delay time i_eWebAlarmDelay Time

Single precision real number

0.0 Delay time at detection of a web alarm signal [ms]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Web break signal o_bWebBreak Bit Turns on when the current value of tension is equal to or larger than the upper limit value or equal to or smaller than lower limit value. The status of this label is held until a web break reset signal turns on.

Web alarm signal o_bWebAlarm Bit Turns on when the current value of tension is equal to or larger than the upper limit value or equal to or smaller than the lower limit value for the delay time, and turns off when the current value of tension returns to a value specified with the hysteresis width.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 123

12

CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement (Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method))

Name CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB generates a cam pattern using travel distances of the winder axis and feed axis for one rotation of the winder axis.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2305 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Execution command

Start measurement

Winder velocity

Back tension torque

Cam No.

Setting of winder axis

Setting of feed axis

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Measurement completed normally

Cam axis length per cycleCam resolution

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_bComp :B

o_dCamCyclLength :DUW: i_uCamResolution

B: i_bEN

B: i_bStart

E: i_eWinderVelocity

E: i_eBackTensionTrq

UW: i_uCamNo

DUT: i_stWinderAxis

DUT: i_stFeedAxis

CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement

4 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Function description This function collects position data with the following operation and generates a cam pattern for the flat roll to the setting cam No. Execution command is on. After a rewinder axis has been positioned in 0 [degree], this function gives a tension using the feeding axis to a material with the tension (back tension torque [%]) that does not loosen the material.

Start measurement is on. This function rotates the rewinder axis once at the winder velocity [r/min], collects the current values of feeding axis and rewinder axis that are rotating every 360 [degree] Cam resolution pitch, and stores the collected values in the input X and output Y of the coordinate cam table.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Set the winder velocity so that the time taken for one rotation is longer than the product of the scan time for FB execution and the cam resolution.

When the scan time is 10 [ms] and the cam resolution is 5000 10[ms] 5000 = 50000[ms] = 50[s] = 0.833[min] Set the velocity to equal to or less than 1/0.833 = 1.2 [r/min]. *When the velocity equal to or more than 1.2 [r/min] is set, a cam pattern is not generated normally. This FB uses the positioning data No. 100 for the positioning control of the rewinder axis. Do not use the positioning data No. 100

of the axis number set to the rewinder axis in user programs. For the acceleration/deceleration time, this FB uses "[Pr.27] Acceleration 3" and "[Pr.30] Deceleration 3". (Initial value: 1000 ms) When setting the acceleration/deceleration time, change these parameters.

When positioning the rewinder axis in user programs, use the SET/RST instruction instead of the OUT instruction so that the Y output for the positioning start can be turned on or off in both of user programs and this FB.

This FB uses index register Z18 and Z19. Do not use them in an interrupt program.

Item Description

Rewinder axis Feeding axis

Back tension torque [%] 0 [degree]

No.

0th point 0.00.0

1st point 0.3 0.5

2nd point 0.7 1.0

nth point coordinate

number

256.8 (Cam length per cycle)

360.0

Coordinate cam table

Rewinder axis

Feeding axis

Rewinder axis

Feeding axis

Back tension torque [%] Back tension torque [%] 360 [degree]

Feeding axis current value (input value X) [mm]

Rewinder axis current value (output value Y) [degree]

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 125

12

Labels Input labels

Setting of winder axis/feed axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Start measurement i_bStart Bit Start measurement is started.

Winder velocity i_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

0.0 < 1.0 Winder velocity [r/min] at the measurement

Back tension torque i_eBackTensionTrq Single precision real number

0.0 <= 10.0 Back tension torque [%] of the feeding axis at the measurement

Cam No. i_uCamNo Word [Unsigned] Refer to the description.

1 Cam No. to be generated 1 to 256 (RD77MS) 1 to 1024 (RD77GF) 1 to 256 (RD78G(S))

Cam resolution i_uCamResolution Word [Unsigned] Refer to the description.

256 Resolution per cam rotation (coordinate number) 2 to 2048 (RD77MS) 2 to 65535 (RD77GF) 2 to 2048 (RD78G(S))

Setting of winder axis

i_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the setting of winder axis/feed axis.

Setting of feed axis i_stFeedAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the setting of winder axis/feed axis.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 1 to the maximum number of axes of the module used

Axis number

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Measurement completed normally

o_bComp Bit Turns on when measurement or cam generation is normally completed.

Cam axis length per cycle

o_dCamCyclLength Double word [Signed] A rewinder axis circumference at the measurement (total travel distance of the feeding axis) is stored [ 0.1 m]. Use this value for the cam control length per cycle.

6 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc (Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method))

Name CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the film feed amount for each angle (each coordinate) from the winding core dimensions and position of the

winder axis to generate a cam pattern.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 2026 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description A cam pattern for flat roll with a constant feed speed is generated by setting the following parameters.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Pulsed execution (multiple scan execution type)

Restrictions and precautions

Execution command

Winding core circumference L

Winding core thickness t

Winding core distance D

Cam No.

Executing

Normal completion

Error completion

Error code

Setting of winder axis

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

DUT: i_stWinderAxis

B: i_bEN

E: i_eWinderLength

E: i_eWinderThickness

E: i_eWinderDistance

UW: i_uCamNo

Cam resolution UW: i_uCamResolution

CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc

Thickness t

* The status shown in the above figure is considered as the start point (0 [degree]) for the rotational position of the winding core to create the cam table.

Semicircle of the diameter t

Straight line interval

Semicircle of the diameter t

Winding core circumference L

Winding core distance D

(Distance from the center of the winding core to the film feeding start point)

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 127

12

Labels Input labels

Rewinder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Winding core circumference L

i_eWinderLength Single precision real number

0.0 < Circumference of a winding core [mm]

Winding core thickness t

i_eWinderThickness Single precision real number

0.0 < Thickness of a winding core (width) [mm]

Winding core distance D

i_eWinderDistance Single precision real number

0.0 < Distance between the center of the winding core and the film feeding start point [mm]

Cam No. i_uCamNo Word [Unsigned] Refer to the description.

1 Cam No. to be generated 1 to 256 (RD77MS) 1 to 1024 (RD77GF) 1 to 256 (RD78G(S))

Cam resolution i_uCamResolution Word [Unsigned] Refer to the description.

256 Resolution per cam rotation (coordinate number) 2 to 2048 (RD77MS) 2 to 65535 (RD77GF) 1 to 256 (RD78G(S))

Setting of winder axis

i_stWinderAxis AXIS_REF Refer to the rewinder axis.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 1 to the maximum number of control axes of the module used

Axis number to be controlled

Start I/O number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal completion o_bOK Bit Turns on when cam generation is normally completed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred during cam generation.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

8 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

STD_Lowpass1 (Low-pass filter)

Name STD_Lowpass1

Function overview

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Item Description Function overview Primary lowpass filter

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 379 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The lowpass filter processing is executed with the following calculation formulas. The gain of filter is Gain and the condition variable is Drp in the formulas.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Reset i_bReset Bit On: The reset value is output to the filter output value.

Input value i_eInput Single precision real number

Input to the filter

Reset value i_eSetValue Single precision real number

Filter reset value

Filter time constant i_eTimeConstant Single precision real number

0.0<= Time constant of filter [ms]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

B: i_bEN

B: i_bReset

E: i_eInput

E: i_eSetValue

E: i_eTimeConstant

E: i_eSamplingTime

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutput :E

Execution command

Reset

Input value

Reset value

Filter time constant

Execution cycle

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output of filter

STD_Lowpass1

Gain = Execution cycle/Filter time constant Drp Drp + Gain (Input value - Drp)

Output of filter Drp

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 129

13

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output of filter o_eOutput Single precision real number

The output of filter is stored.

0 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

STD_AverageValueFilter (Moving average filter)

Name STD_AverageValueFilter

Function overview

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Item Description Function overview Moving average filter

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 507 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description This FB outputs the input value on which the moving average processing is performed with the average number of (Filter time constant/Execution cycle).

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Set the averaging number (Filter time constant/Execution cycle) to 2000 or less. Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Input value i_eInput Single precision real number Input to the filter

Filter time constant i_eTimeConstant Single precision real number 0.0 <= Time constant of filter [ms]

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number 0.0 < Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the filter processing is being executed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output of filter o_eOutput Single precision real number The output of filter is stored.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eInput

E: i_eTimeConstant

E: i_eSamplingTime

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutput :E

Execution command

Input value

Filter time constant

Execution cycle

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output of filter

STD_AverageValueFilter

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 131

13

STD_Limiter (Limiter)

Name STD_Limiter

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB outputs the input value after the upper/lower limit control.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 325 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The input value is limited with the setting values of upper/lower limit and output.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

B: i_bEN

E: i_eInput

E: i_eUpperLimit

E: i_eLowerLimit

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutput :E

o_bUpperLimit :B

o_bLowerLimit :B

Execution command

Input value

Setting value of upper limit

Setting value of lower limit

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output value

Upper limit

Lower limit

STD_Limiter

Input value

Setting value of upper limit

Setting value of lower limit

Output value

Setting value of upper limit

Setting value of lower limit

Upper limit

Lower limit

2 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Input value i_eInput Single precision real number

Input value

Setting value of upper limit

i_eUpperLimit Single precision real number

Lower limit < Upper limit value

Setting value of lower limit

i_eLowerLimit Single precision real number

Upper limit > Lower limit value

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the filter processing is being executed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output value o_eOutput Single precision real number

The input value limited with the upper/lower limit values is stored.

Upper limit o_bUpperLimit Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the input value is equal to or larger than the upper limit value.

Lower limit o_bLowerLimit Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the input value is equal to or smaller than the lower limit value.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 133

13

STD_TableInterpolation (Table interpolation (2000 points))

Name STD_TableInterpolation

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the output value (Y) in response to the input value (X) using the X and Y point tables.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 501 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The output value in response to the input value is calculated as shown in the figure below.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Set the X-coordinate values in ascending order and 2000 or less points.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eInputX

DUT: i_stTable

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutputY :E

Execution command

Input value

Point table setting

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output value

STD_TableInterpolation

x0, y0

x6, y6

x1, y1 x2, y2

x3, y3 x4, y4

x5, y5

InputX

OutputY

X

Y

4 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

XY_TABLE_REF structure

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Input value i_eInputX Single precision real number

Input value

Point table setting i_stTable XY_TABLE_REF Refer to XY_TABLE_REF.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Number of points NumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 2000 Number of points

X-coordinate value eTableX [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate

eTableX [1] Single precision real number

eTableX [0] < Second point in the X-coordinate

Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint-2] <

nth point in the X-coordinate

Y-coordinate value eTableY [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate

eTableY [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate

Single precision real number

eTableY [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the filter processing is being executed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output value o_eOutputY Single precision real number

The table output value in response to the input value is stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 135

13

STD_Table50Interpolation (Table interpolation (50 points))

Name STD_Table50Interpolation

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the output value (Y) in response to the input value (X) using the X and Y point tables.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 633 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The output value in response to the input value is calculated as shown in the figure below.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Set the X-coordinate values in ascending order and 50 or less points.

B: i_bEN

E: i_eInputX

DUT: i_stTable

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eOutputY :E

Execution command

Input value

Point table setting

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Output value

STD_Table50Interpolation

x0, y0

x6, y6

x1, y1 x2, y2

x3, y3

x4, y4

x5, y5

InputX

OutputY

X

Y

6 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

XY_TABLE50_REF structure

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Input value i_eInputX Single precision real number

Input value

Point table setting i_stTable XY_TABLE50_REF Refer to XY_TABLE50_REF.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Number of measuring points

NumPoint Single precision real number

2 to 50 Number of measuring points

X-coordinate value eTableX [0] Single precision real number

First point in the X-coordinate

eTableX [1] Single precision real number

eTableX [0] < Second point in the X-coordinate

Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

eTableX [NumPoint-2] <

nth point in the X-coordinate

Y-coordinate value eTableY [0] Single precision real number

First point in the Y-coordinate

eTableY [1] Single precision real number

Second point in the Y-coordinate

Single precision real number

eTableY [NumPoint-1] Single precision real number

nth point in the Y-coordinate

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the filter processing is being executed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit When this device is on, it indicates that an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Output value o_eOutputY Single precision real number

The table output value in response to the input value is stored.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 137

13

STD_RampGenerator (Ramp generator)

Name STD_RampGenerator

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB generates a changeable command value with acceleration/deceleration times to reach the target value.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 664 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description

When Rapid command output is on, the target value is output to the command value without acceleration/deceleration processing.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Execute this FB in a fixed cycle.

E: i_eSamplingTime

E: i_eDecTime

B: i_bTargetThrough

B: i_bEN

E: i_eTargetValue

E: i_eAccTime

o_bInValue :B

o_bAccelerating :B

o_bDecelerating :B

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eCommandValue :E

Execution cycle

Deceleration time

Rapid command output

Execution command

Target value

Acceleration time

Executing

In value

During acceleration

During deceleration

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

Command value

STD_RampGenerator

Command value

During deceleration

During acceleration

In value

Target value setting

Rapid command output

Execution command

100

160

-100

-160

AccTime

AccTime

DecTime

DecTime

DecTime

0160 160 160100 0 0-160 -100

8 4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library

4

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Target value i_eTargetValue Single precision real number

Target value setting

Acceleration time i_eAccTime Single precision real number

0.0<= Setting of the acceleration time [ms] taken to reach the target value

Deceleration time i_eDecTime Single precision real number

0.0<= Setting of the deceleration time [ms] taken to reach the target value

Rapid command output i_bTargetThrough Bit On: The target value is output as the command value. Off: Acceleration time and deceleration time are used to determine the command value.

Execution cycle i_eSamplingTime Single precision real number

0.0< Execution cycle [ms] of the program for executing the FB

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Command value o_eCommandValue Single precision real number

Command value

In value o_bInValue Bit Turns on when the speed reaches the target value.

During acceleration o_bAccelerating Bit Turns on during acceleration.

During deceleration o_bDecelerating Bit Turns on during deceleration.

4 FB LIBRARY 4.2 Details of the FB Library 139

14

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE For the system to perform unwinding and rewinding, three application program examples are provided. Controlling all axes including the unwinder and rewinder axes by using the servo amplifier Basic Adding the reel change part for the roll change to the basic system Reel change Controlling the unwinder and rewinder axes by using the inverter Inverter The following table lists the devices used in each application program example.

*1 It used only when a reel change is provided. *2 "****" indicates their versions.

Precautions When diverting the application program (example) into the actual system, take the following actions on user's own responsibility. Sufficiently confirm that the screens will not cause system control problems. Examine the positions where interlock conditions are required and add them. Change the initial values of variables and constants as necessary.

Program example

Unwinder /rewinder axis

Main axis/ edge position axis

Turret axis*1

Network Project name (GX Works3)

Project name (GT Works3)

Reference

Basic Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

SSCNET/H AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 77MS16_****.gx3*2

AP20- CNV002AA- GT27nnV_****. GTX*2

Page 141 System Configuration Page 147 Operation Specifications Page 148 Control specifications Page 148 Program configuration Page 150 Parameter Page 150 Program processing Page 159 ExamplePrgCtrl FB Page 161 Operation procedure

CC-Link IE Field

AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 77GF16_****.gx3*2

CC-Link IE TSN

AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 78G16_****.gx3*2

Reel change Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

SSCNET/H AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 77MS16_****.gx3*2

Page 141 System Configuration Page 147 Operation Specifications Page 163 Control specifications Page 167 Program configuration Page 169 Parameter Page 176 Program processing Page 183 ExamplePrgReelChange FB Page 187 Operation procedure

CC-Link IE Field

AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 77GF16_****.gx3*2

CC-Link IE TSN

AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 78GF16_****.gx3*2

Inverter Inverter (I/ O mode)

Servo amplifier

CC-Link IE Field

AP20-CNV002AA- R16- 77GF16_CCINV_****. gx3*2

Page 141 System Configuration Page 147 Operation Specifications Page 196 Control specifications Page 196 Program configuration Page 198 Parameter Page 200 Program processing Page 206 INVExample FB Page 214 Operation procedure

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE

5

5.1 System Configuration

System configuration AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3 (SSCNET/H) [Basic]

[Reel change] An unwinder axis and a turret axis for the roll change are added in the [Basic] system.

Unwinder axis

Main axis

Edge position

axis

Rewinder axis

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Simple Motion module RD77MS16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Ethernet

Axis 4Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3

MR-J4-500B MR-J4-20B

Servo amplifier

Unwinder axis A

Unwinder axis B

Turret axis

Simple Motion module RD77MS16

I/O combined module RH42C4NT2P

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

Axis 6

PLC CPU R16CPU

Ethernet

Axis 1 GOT2000 GT27**-V

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

Axis 5

Main axis

Rewinder axis

Axis 3

Edge position

axis

Axis 4Axis 2 MR-J4-20BMR-J4-500B MR-J4-500B

Servo amplifier

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration 141

14

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77GF16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE Field) [Basic]

[Reel change] An unwinder axis and a turret axis for the roll change are added in the [Basic] system.

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77GF16_CCINV_****.gx3 (When using an inverter in CC-Link IE Field) [Inverter]

*1 Any of FR-A8AP/FR-A8APR/FR-A8AL/FR-A8TP is required as the built-in encoder connection option.

Ethernet SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Simple Motion module RD77GF16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Axis 4Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3

MR-J4-500GF MR-J4-20GF

Servo amplifier

Unwinder axis

Main axis

Edge position

axis

Rewinder axis

Unwinder axis A

Unwinder axis B

Turret axis

Simple Motion module RD77GF16

I/O combined module RH42C4NT2P

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

Axis 6

PLC CPU R16CPU

Ethernet

Axis 1

GOT2000 GT27**-V

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

Axis 5

Edge position

axis

Axis 4

Main axis

Rewinder axis

Axis 3Axis 2 MR-J4-500GF MR-J4-20GF MR-J4-500GF

Servo amplifier

MR-J4-500GF MR-J4-20GF

Motion modeI/O mode I/O mode

17 station 18 station

Inverter FR-A820-5.5K-GF*1

Ethernet Rewinder axisSD memory card

NZ1MEM-2GBSD

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Simple Motion module RD77GF16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Axis 2 Axis 4

Servo amplifier

Unwinder axis

Main axis

Edge position

axis

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration

5

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-78G16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE TSN) [Basic]

[Reel change] An unwinder axis and a turret axis for the roll change are added in the [Basic] system.

Unwinder axis

Motion module RD78G16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Ethernet

Axis 1 GOT2000 GT27**-V

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

Edge position

axis

Axis 4

Main axis

Rewinder axis

Axis 3Axis 2 MR-J5-500G MR-J5-20G

Servo amplifier

MR-J5-20GMR-J5-500G

Ethernet SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Motion module RD78G16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Axis 1 Axis 4

Servo amplifier RH42C4NT2P

Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 5 Axis 6 MR-J5-500G

Unwinder axis A

Unwinder axis B

Turret axis

Edge position

axis

Main axis

Rewinder axis

I/O combined module

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration 143

14

Equipment configuration [Basic (RD77MS, RD77GF)] [Inverter (RD77GF)]

[Basic (RD78G(S))] The configuration is the same as [Basic (RD77MS, RD77GF)] except for the motor model.

M

M

M

SF-PR-SC5K4P(5.5kW, 1800r/min) 8192 pulse/rev(4-multiplication)

HG-SR502(5kW, 2000r/min)

SF-PR-SC5K4P(5.5kW, 1800r/min) 8192 pulse/rev(4-multiplication)

When an inverter is used

Torque winding

Gear ratio 1/10

HG-SR502 (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Rewinder axis

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Tension detection

0 to 200 N

0 to 10 V

Edge sensor

Edge sensor

Edge position axis (Nip roll: Lateral movement)

-30 to +30 mm (-10 to 10 V)

HG-KR23 (0.2kW, 3000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Ball screw pitch = 5 mm

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Roller circumference = 500 mm Roller diameter = 159.1549 mm

Gear ratio 1/10

Gear ratio 1/5

4194304 pulse/rev

Main axis

Upper limit: +500 mm (+10 V)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -500 mm (-10 V)

Dancer roll position

detectionUnwinder axis HG-SR502 (5kW, 2000 r/min)

4194304 pulse/rev

Velocity winding

M

M

MHK-ST502W(5kW, 2000r/min)

Torque winding

Gear ratio 1/10

HK-ST502W (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Rewinder axis

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Tension detection

0 to 200 N

0 to 10 V

Edge sensor

Edge sensor

Edge position axis (Nip roll: Lateral movement)

-30 to +30 mm (-10 to 10 V)

HK-KT23UW (0.2kW, 3000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Ball screw pitch = 5 mm

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Roller circumference = 500 mm Roller diameter = 159.1549 mm

Gear ratio 1/10

Gear ratio 1/5

4194304 pulse/rev

Main axis

Upper limit: +500 mm (+10 V)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -500 mm (-10 V)

Dancer roll position

detectionUnwinder axis HK-ST502W (5kW, 2000 r/min)

4194304 pulse/rev

Velocity winding

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration

5

[Reel change (RD77MS, RD77GF)] The following figure shows the configuration of the reel change part. The reel change part is added in the [Basic] system.

[Reel change (RD78G(S))] The configuration is the same as [Reel change (RD77MS, RD77GF)] except for the motor model.

M M

M

HG-SR502 (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Turret axis

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Gear ratio 1/10

HG-SR502 (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

HG-SR502 (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Upper limit: +500 mm (+10 V)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -500 mm (-10 V)

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Velocity windingVelocity winding

Unwinder axis (running)Unwinder axis (Waiting)

Dancer roll position

detection

Turret axis lock mechanism

Roll edge detection sensor

Touch roll Cutter

Tape detection sensor

Gear ratio 1/10

Gear ratio 1/5

M M

M

HK-ST502W (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Turret axis

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Gear ratio 1/10

HK-ST502W (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

HK-ST502W (5kW, 2000 r/min) 4194304 pulse/rev

Upper limit: +500 mm (+10 V)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -500 mm (-10 V)

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

Velocity windingVelocity winding

Unwinder axis (running)Unwinder axis (Waiting)

Dancer roll position

detection

Turret axis lock mechanism

Roll edge detection sensor

Touch roll Cutter

Tape detection sensor

Gear ratio 1/10

Gear ratio 1/5

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration 145

14

The following shows the positional relations between the unwinder axis and sensors in the reel change mechanism. Positions of the unwinder axis, turret axis, and roll edge detection sensor Distance between the turret axis and unwinder axis (new waiting): L = 1200 mm Installation angle of the roll edge detection sensor = 40 degrees

Positions of the cutter, touch roll, and tape detection sensor Distance between the cutting point and contact point of the touch roll: L = 300 mm Angle between the contact point of the touch roll and the detection point of the tape detection sensor: = 90 degrees

Unwinder axis (new waiting)

L

L

Turret turning direction Roll edge detection sensor detection point

Turret axis

L

Cutter cutting point

Contact point of the unwinder axis and touch roll

Tape detection sensor detection point

Rotational direction of the unwinder axis

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.1 System Configuration

5

5.2 Operation Specifications The following shows the operation specifications for each application program example. Line operation velocity: 0 to 100 m/min Line operation acceleration: 20 (m/min)/s, jerk: 20 (m/min)/s2

Material: Plastic film (PET) Film thickness: 0.05 mm Film width: 1000 mm Film specific gravity: 1350 kg/m3

Minimum roll diameter: 200 mm Maximum roll diameter: 1000 mm Set tension: 100 N Mechanical inertia of the rewinder axis: 0.611 kgm2

Turret axis turning speed: 3 r/min (180 degrees/10 s)*1

*1 It used only when a reel change is provided.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.2 Operation Specifications 147

14

5.3 Basic Control specifications The tension control is started by a start signal and continuously operates until the diameter of the rewind web material reaches the set rewinding diameter.

Program configuration This application program does not have maintenance functions, such as home position return and JOG operation. Create the functions as needed.

Language The following languages are used in this program. Program comment: English Label comment: Japanese, English, Chinese (Simplified)

List of programs

Item Unwinder axis Main axis Rewinder axis Edge position axis Axis number 1 2 3 4

Control mode Velocity Velocity Torque Velocity

Detector Dancer roll Tension detector Edge sensor

Tension gain auto tuning

Winding diameter calculation Web thickness integration method

Feeding length method

Taper tension None Table method

Direction Upper unwinding Upper rewinding

Inertia compensation, friction compensation

Control cycle 0.888 ms (RD77MS)/1.0 ms (RD77GF)/1.0 ms (RD78G(S))

Program name Description Execution type Describing method Initial Initial parameter setting Initial ST

WinderControl Tension control main processing Main axis control Unwinder axis control (speed control) Rewinder axis control (torque control) Edge position axis control Web break detection

Event (I44) (RD77MS, RD77GF) Fixed cycle (1 ms) (RD78G(S))

FBD

PreOperation Preparing operation, line operation control Servo ON/OFF Reset error Start line operation

Scan FBD

HMI_IF Touch panel I/O processing Scan ST

UnWinderGainChange Unwinder axis gain change Scan FBD

FrictionTorqueMeasurement Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement Fixed cycle (5 ms) FBD

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

FB CNV_TensionControl_R (Refer to "Page 47 FB LIBRARY".)

ExamplePrgCtrl (Refer to "Page 159 ExamplePrgCtrl FB".)

Item FB name Description Program Activation CNV_Activation License activation PreOperation

Tension control CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl Dancer feedback velocity control WinderControl

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl Tension sensor feedback torque control WinderControl

Velocity generator CNV_LineVelocityGenerator Line velocity generator WinderControl

Roll diameter calculation CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method)

WinderControl

CNV_DiaCalcFeed Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method) WinderControl

Torque compensation CNV_WinderInertiaTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation WinderControl

CNV_InertiaCalc Load inertia ratio calculation UnWinderGainChange

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque Friction compensation torque calculation WinderControl

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement Friction torque measurement FrictionTorqueMeasurement

Tuning function CNV_WinderGainChange Gain change UnWinderGainChange

CNV_TaperTension Taper tension calculation WinderControl

CNV_PIDControl PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning) WinderControl

Additional function CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge position control WinderControl

CNV_WebBreakDetect Web break detection WinderControl

Filters STD_Lowpass1 Low-pass filter WinderControl

STD_AverageValueFilter Moving average filter WinderControl

STD_Limiter Limiter WinderControl

STD_TableInterpolation Table interpolation WinderControl

FB name Description Describing method

Program

MotionReady Simple Motion module start processing ST PreOperation

ServoON Servo ON processing ST PreOperation

MotionErrorReset Error reset processing ST PreOperation

DancerPos Dancer position A/D value conversion processing ST WinderControl

TensionAD Tension detector A/D value conversion processing ST WinderControl

GainPrChg Gain parameter servo amplifier write processing [RD77MS, RD77GF]

ST UnWinderGainChange [RD77MS, RD77GF]

GainPrChg_RD78 Gain parameter servo amplifier write processing [RD78G(S)]

ST UnWinderGainChange [RD78G(S)]

WinderSpdMonitor Real rotation speed display processing (rewinder axis) ST WinderControl

EdgePos A/D value conversion processing at the edge sensor detection position ST WinderControl

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 149

15

Parameter For the settings of the parameter, refer to the project.

Precautions In this application program, the emergency stop and limit function with external signals are disabled. To utilize this application program, change the settings depending on the system used.

Program processing

Initial (Initial parameter setting) Set event task starts, each variable's initial value, and constants. Setting of execution cycle Setting of unwinder axis Setting of main axis Setting of rewinder axis Setting of edge position axis Web break detection parameter

WinderControl (Tension control main processing) Main axis control When Enable line operation (bLineOpeOK) turns on, the main axis command velocity generation FB (CNV_LineVelocityGenerator) is started. Once the FB is started, the mode of the set main axis is changed to the speed mode, and the operation starts at the set velocity (acceleration, deceleration) when Start line axis (blineAxisStart) turns on.

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

Unwinder axis control When Start dancer control (bUnwdDancerCtrl) turns on, the dancer feedback velocity control FB (CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl) is started. The dancer detection analog value is converted into a position, filtered with the moving average filter (10 ms), and input in the feedback value of the velocity control FB. The velocity is controlled to make the dancer position reach the target position. Every time the unwinder axis rotates, the roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method) FB decrements the thickness value and calculates the current winding diameter. The current winding diameter is input in the velocity control FB, and the velocity is controlled to make the circumferential velocity reach the line velocity.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 151

15

Rewinder axis control When Start tension control of rewinder (bWdTensionCtrl) turns on, the tension sensor feedback torque control FB (CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl) is started. The tension detection analog value is converted into a tension value, filtered with the lowpass filter (10 ms), and input in the feedback value of the torque control FB. The torque is controlled to make the tension detection value reach the target value. The roll diameter calculation (feeding length) FB calculates the current winding diameter from the feeding length of the main axis per rotation of the unwinder axis and the diameter is input in the torque control FB. The torque is controlled with the command torque of the set tension x (Current winding diameter/2).

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

Edge position axis control When Enable line operation (bLineOpeOK) turns on, the edge position control FB (CNV_EdgePositionCtrl) started. The edge sensor analog value is converted into an edge position, and the velocity is controlled so that the edge position reaches the target position.

Web break detection When the line speed is equal to the set velocity (bInLineVelocity), the web break detection FB (CNV_WebBreakDetect) is started. A web break detection is output (turns on) when the current value of tension is equal to or larger than the upper limit value or equal to or smaller than the lower limit value.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 153

15

PreOperation (Preparing operation, line operation control) Simple Motion module start processing Always ON while the CPU is running

Servo ON processing When Preparing operation (bOpeReady) turned on in the GOT screen, the servo ON processing is performed.

Error reset processing of each axis Reset errors of the axis used.

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

Line operation start processing When Start Line operation (bLineOpeStart) turns on in the GOT screen and the current rewinder diameter is equal to or smaller than the rewinder diameter for stopping line, the line operation starts.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 155

15

HMI_IF (Touch panel I/O processing) The processing for displaying the GOT screen is performed.

Backs up the index register values.

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the unwinder axis.

Alarm: 2, Servo ON: 1, Servo OFF: 0

Unwinder in speed control mode

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the main axis.

Main axis in speed mode

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the rewinder axis.

Rewinder in torque control mode

Tension setting for the simulator

Rewinder axis Start of FB for monitoring the current velocity

Un\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Un\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Servo state of unwinder (wUnwdSvSt)

Alarm: 2, Servo ON: 1, Servo OFF: 0

Servo state of main axis (wLineSvSt)

Un\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Alarm: 2, Servo ON: 1, Servo OFF: 0

Servo state of rewinder (wWdSvSt)

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

UnWinderGainChange (Unwinder axis gain change) The velocity gain of the servo parameter is changed according to the load inertia change caused by the roll diameter change in the unwinder axis. [RD77MS, RD77GF]

[RD78G(S)]

Edge position axis status (wEgPosCtrlSvSt)

Reads the backed up index register values.

Inputs the rated torque and gear ratio of the rewinder axis.

Un\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the edge position axis.

Alarm: 2,

Servo OFF: 0 Servo ON: 1,

Edge position axis Current value monitor

Edge position axis in speed control mode

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 157

15

FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement) When the START switch (bWdFrTblMake) in the GOT screen is touched, the torque of the rewinder axis is measured without rolls installed (five points of up to the maximum rotation speed) and the torque table for mechanical loss torque compensation is created.

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

ExamplePrgCtrl FB

MotionReady This FB starts the Simple Motion module for the start I/O number setting. To perform the amplifier-less operation, turn on i_bAmplessMode to start the module. However, this FB does not support the amplifier-less operation of the RD78G(S).

ServoON This FB performs the servo ON processing for the corresponding axis in the axis setting.

MotionErrorReset This FB performs the motion error reset processing for the corresponding axis in the axis setting.

DancerPos This FB converts an A/D output value into a dancer position (single precision real number).

TensionAD This FB converts an A/D output value into a tension value (single precision real number).

Execution command (Bit)

Amplifier-less operation (Bit)

Start I/O number (Word [Unsigned])

Executing (Bit)

Execution command (Bit)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF) Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Executing (Bit)

Reset (Bit)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF) Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Dancer position conversion value

(Single precision real number)(Word [Signed]) A/D module output value

A/D module output value

(Word [Signed])

Tension conversion value

(Single precision real number)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 159

16

GainPrChg In the RD77MS and RD77GF, this FB changes the values in the servo parameter PB06 (Ratio of load inertia moment GD2) and PB09 (Velocity gain VG2) of the corresponding axis in the axis setting to set values.

GainPrChg_RD78 In the RD78G(S), this FB changes the values in the servo parameter PB06 (Ratio of load inertia moment GD2) and PB09 (Velocity gain VG2) of the corresponding axis in the axis setting to set values.

WinderSpdMonitor This FB calculates the current rewinder velocity of the rewinder axis of the corresponding axis in the axis setting.

EdgePos This FB converts an A/D output value into an edge position (single precision real number).

Execution command (Bit)

GD2 setting (Single precision real number)

VG2 setting (Single precision real number)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Execution command (Bit)

GD2 setting (Single precision real number)

VG2 setting (Single precision real number)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Winder actual velocity [r/min] (Single precision real number)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Gear ratio (Single precision real number)

Edge position conversion value (Single precision real number)

A/D module output value (Word [Signed])

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

Operation procedure Start the operation with the following procedure. (For the function details of windows, refer to "6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES".)

1. Write project data to the PLC CPU and GOT and start the system. Touch the Operation monitor window.

2. Touch the [ON] switch of Preparing operation. Turning on of Preparing operation sets all axis in the servo-on status and starts the main axis in the speed control mode.

3. Touch the [Winding Diameter] switch. The initial winding diameter is set as the winding diameter (current value).

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic 161

16

4. Touch the [ON] switch of Dancer control. Turning on of Dancer control starts the unwinder axis in the speed control mode and moves the dancer to the set position.

5. Touch the [ON] switch of Tension control. Turning on of Tension control starts the rewinder axis in the torque control mode and sets the tension setting value as the set tension.

6. Touch the [START] switch of Line operation. The operation starts at the set line speed and the edge position control starts in the speed control mode.

7. The line operation stops when the [STOP] switch of Line operation is touched or the rewinder diameter reaches the last rewinder diameter.

When the [STOP] switch of Line operation is touched or the rewinder diameter reaches the last rewinder diameter.

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.3 Basic

5

5.4 Reel Change An unwinder axis and a turret axis for the roll change are added in the [Basic] system for this control. The project of the provided program example contains the program for the reel change but it is a standby program. To use the reel change function, change the program setting. Axis settings for the added two axes are not set. Configure the system setting/network setting, axis parameter setting, and positioning data setting of the Simple Motion module.

Control specifications

Axis operation specifications Use the unwinder axis (Axis No. 1) as Unwinder axis A, and add Unwinder axis B and a turret turning axis. Start the tension control by using a start signal. When the rewinder diameter reaches the set rewinding diameter, rotate the turret turning axis to replace the unwinder axis.

I/O devices The following table lists the I/O devices for each function.

Item Unwinder axis A Unwinder axis B Turret turning axis Axis number 1 5 6

Control mode Velocity Velocity Position

Detector Dancer roll Dancer roll

Tension gain auto tuning

Winding diameter calculation Web thickness integration method Web thickness integration method

Taper tension None None

Direction Upper unwinding Upper unwinding

Inertia compensation, friction compensation

Control cycle 0.888 ms (RD77MS)/1.0 ms (RD77GF)/1.0 ms (RD78G(S))

Type Function Device Input Roll edge detection sensor X30

Tape detection sensor X31

Output Turret axis unlock request Y30

Touch roll operation request Y31

Cutter operation request Y32

Reel change prealarm Y33

Reel change alarm output Y34

Paste / Cut warning Y35

Unwinder axis initial diameter calculation error Y36

Cutter operating information creation error Y37

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 163

16

Operation timing

Procedure The following figure shows the configuration of the reel change equipment.

A

B

Reel change Prealarm

Waiting reel ready

Reel change in operation

Turret axis unlock

Roll edge detection sensor detection

Execution of initial winding diameter calculation

Waiting axis rotation command

In target velocity of waiting axis

Calculation of touch roll/cutter operation timing

Adhesion tape detection

Running axis rotation command

Turret turningStand-by Reel change Stand-by

Turret axis rotation ON

Touch roll ON

Cutter ON

PID control axis

B: Cutter operation angle A: Touch roll operation angle

A-axis B-axis

Cutter Touch roll

Tape detection sensor

Running axis

Roll edge detection sensor

Waiting axis

Adhesion tape

Turret

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

The following describes the procedure for operating the reel change equipment.

Status Operation figure Description Stand- by

1. During unwinding operation of the running axis Set a new roll to the waiting axis and touch the [ON] switch of Waiting reel

ready. When the running axis diameter is equal to or smaller than the turn

notification diameter, the PreAlarm lamp turns on.

Turret turning

2. Determination of the turret turning condition Determine whether to rotate the turret when the running axis diameter is equal to or smaller than the diameter at the start of the reel change or when the [Reel change forced execution] switch is touched. When Waiting reel ready is on, the reel change operation is started and

the reel change status changes to [Turret turning]. When Waiting reel ready is off, the reel change operation is not performed

and the line operation is stopped. The reel change status remains [Stand- by].

3. Turret turning The equipment operates in the following order. 1) The Reel change start lamp turns on. 2) The turret lock is unlocked. 3) The turret axis starts rotating.

4. Calculations of the waiting reel diameter and timing to descend the touch roll/cutter After the turret axis starts rotating, the waiting axis diameter and the

position to descend the touch roll/cutter (roll rotation position) are calculated.

The waiting axis starts rotating at a peripheral velocity corresponding to the line speed based on the calculated diameter.

5. Determination of the turret turning completion The equipment operates in the following order. After completion of the operation, the reel change status changes to [Reel change]. 1) The turret rotates to the rotation end position and stops. 2) Lock the turret lock. The reel change operation can be stopped before completion of the turret rotation. When the operation is stopped, manually perform the required operations such as rotating and stopping of the turret operation.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 165

16

*1 To safely perform the reel change in the waiting status, use the STO function of servo amplifiers.

Reel change

6. Touch roll operation The touch roll descends after the tape detection sensor turns on and the tape passes under the touch roll.

7. Cutter operation After the touch roll descends in the step 6., the tape detection sensor operation triggers to rotate the waiting axis by the cutter operation angle and to cut a workpiece with the cutter. If the tape is not detected even after one revolution of the waiting axis after the touch roll descends, the cutter works because it determined that the adhesive tape has adhered to a workpiece. In this case, the paste/cut warning is displayed. (This warning occurs when the touch roll descends before the tape passes under the touch roll.)

8. Post processing Return the touch roll and cutter to their waiting positions. Switch the PID control axis from the running axis to waiting axis. Waiting reel ready turns off. Decelerate and stop the running axis.*1

The start signal turns off. When the operation is completed, the reel change status changes to [Stand- by].

Stand- by

Same as the above Return to step 1.. (The waiting axis and running axis are switched.)

Status Operation figure Description

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Program configuration

Language The following languages are used in this program. Program comment: English Label comment: Japanese, English, Chinese (Simplified)

List of programs

FB CNV_TensionControl_R (Refer to "Page 47 FB LIBRARY".)

Program name Description Execution type Describing method InitialReelChange Initial parameter setting Initial ST

ReelChange Reel change Event Ladder

WinderControlReelChange Tension control main processing: for reel change Main axis control Unwinder axis (running axis/waiting axis) control (speed control) Rewinder axis control (torque control) Edge position control Web break detection

Event (I44) (RD77MS, RD77GF) Fixed cycle (1 ms) (RD78G(S))

FBD

PreOperationReelChange Preparing operation, line operation control Servo ON/OFF Reset error Start line operation

Scan FBD

HMI_IFReelChange Touch panel I/O processing Scan ST

UnWinderGainChange Unwinder axis gain change Scan FBD

FrictionTorqueMeasurement Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement Fixed cycle (5 ms) FBD

Item FB name Description Program Activation CNV_Activation License activation PreOperationReelChange

Tension control CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl Dancer feedback velocity control WinderControlReelChange

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl Tension sensor feedback torque control WinderControlReelChange

Velocity generator CNV_LineVelocityGenerator Line velocity generator WinderControlReelChange

Roll diameter calculation

CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method) WinderControlReelChange

CNV_DiaCalcFeed Roll diameter calculation (Feeding length method) WinderControlReelChange

Torque compensation

CNV_WinderInertiaTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation WinderControlReelChange

CNV_InertiaCalc Load inertia ratio calculation UnWinderGainChange

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque Friction compensation value calculation WinderControlReelChange

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement Friction torque measurement FrictionTorqueMeasurement

Tuning function CNV_WinderGainChange Gain change UnWinderGainChange

CNV_TaperTension Taper tension calculation WinderControlReelChange

CNV_PIDControl PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning) WinderControlReelChange

Additional function CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge position control WinderControlReelChange

CNV_WebBreakDetect Web break detection WinderControlReelChange

Filters STD_Lowpass1 Low-pass filter WinderControlReelChange

STD_AverageValueFilter Moving average filter WinderControlReelChange

STD_Limiter Limiter WinderControlReelChange

STD_TableInterpolation Table interpolation WinderControlReelChange

STD_RampGenerator Ramp generator WinderControlReelChange

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 167

16

ExamplePrgCtrl (Refer to "Page 159 ExamplePrgCtrl FB".)

ExamplePrgReelChange (Refer to "Page 183 ExamplePrgReelChange FB".)

FB name Description Describing method

Program

MotionReady Simple Motion module start processing ST PreOperationReelChange

ServoON Servo ON processing ST PreOperationReelChange

MotionErrorReset Error reset processing ST PreOperationReelChange

DancerPos Dancer position A/D value conversion processing ST WinderControlReelChange

TensionAD Tension detector A/D value conversion processing ST WinderControlReelChange

GainPrChg Gain parameter servo amplifier write processing ST UnWinderGainChange

WinderSpdMonitor Real rotation speed display processing (rewinder axis) ST WinderControlReelChange

EdgePos A/D value conversion processing at the edge sensor detection position ST WinderControlReelChange

FB name Description Describing method Program CalcTouchRollCutterAngle Touch roll & cutter operating angle calculation ST WinderControlReelChange

DiaCalcTurretAngle Roll diameter calculation (turret angle method) ST WinderControlReelChange

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Parameter

Module information To use the reel change, add the I/O module (RH42C4NT2P) with the slot No.2 and the start I/O number 0030H.

Precautions To add a new module, setting the inter-module synchronization function to "Not Use" in "Inter-module Synchronization Setting" is required. Return the setting after adding a new module.

CPU parameter Program settings To use the reel change program example, change the program execution type as follows. [RD77MS, RD77GF]

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 169

17

[RD78G(S)]

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Adding the axis settings AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3 (SSCNET/H) Add Axis 5 (Unwinder axis B) and Axis 6 (Turret axis) in the system setting of the Simple Motion module setting as follows.

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77GF16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE Field) Add Axis 5 (Unwinder axis B) and Axis 6 (Turret axis) in the network configuration settings as follows.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 171

17

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-78G16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE TSN) Add Axis 5 (Unwinder axis B) and Axis 6 (Turret axis) in the network configuration settings as follows.

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Parameter, positioning data This following shows the positioning data and parameters that need to be changed from their default values for Axis 5 and Axis 6 to be added for the reel change program example.

Precautions In this application program, the emergency stop and limit function with external signals are disabled. To utilize this application program, change the settings depending on the system used. AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3 (SSCNET/H)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 173

17

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77GF16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE Field)

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-78G16_****.gx3 (CC-Link IE TSN)

Positioning data of Axis 6

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 175

17

Program processing

InitialReelChange (Initial parameter setting) Set event task starts, each variable's initial value, and constants. The running axis is handled as A-axis and the waiting axis is handled as B-axis at power-on. Setting of execution cycle Setting of unwinder axis Setting of main axis Setting of rewinder axis Setting of edge position axis Web break detection parameter Setting of unwinder axis (A-axis/B-axis) Setting of turret axis Setting of reel change

ReelChange (Reel Change) Two axes are controlled as the unwinding waiting axis and unwinding running axis. This program operates the turret turning axis, turret lock, touch roll, and auxiliary of cutter required for the reel change operation are operated. During automatic operation, the PreAlarm signal is output when the winding diameter is smaller than "Turn notification diameter". When the winding diameter is smaller than "Diameter at reel change start", the reel change operation is automatically started. During manual operation, the reel change function is unavailable. Maintenance operations such as JOG operation and turret unlock can be performed. The following shows the program processing of the reel change. The input operation and display on the GOT is described in [ ].

Processing Description Preparing operation control of unwinder axis A (Preparing operation control of unwinder axis B)

Performs the following processing (1) to (4). (1) Preparing operation Turns on/off the preparing operation of the unwinder axis A with Preparing operation [ON]/[OFF]. (2) Automatic operation mode (The unwinder axis A is the unwinding waiting axis.) Turns on/off the preparing operation of the unwinder axis A with A-axis [ON]/[OFF] of Servo ON/OFF. (3) Automatic operation mode (The unwinder axis A is the unwinding running axis.) The preparing operation of the unwinder axis A is always on. (The A axis [ON]/[OFF] operation of Servo ON/OFF is ignored.) (4) Manual operation mode Turns on/off the preparing operation of the unwinder axis A with A-axis [ON]/[OFF] of Servo ON/OFF. (For the preparing operation control of the unwinder axis B, replace A with B in the above description.)

Preparing operation control of turret axis

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Preparing operation Turns on/off the preparing operation of the turret axis with Preparing operation [ON]/[OFF]. (2) Manual operation mode The preparing operation of the turret axis is always on. (The turret [ON]/[OFF] operation of Servo ON/OFF is ignored.) (3) Manual operation mode Turns on/off the preparing operation of the turret axis with Preparing operation [ON]/[OFF] of Servo ON/OFF.

Unwinder axis A JOG operation (Unwinder axis B JOG operation)

When the following condition is satisfied, the operation of JOG operation A-axis [Forward]/[Reverse] sets the JOG speed of the unwinder axis A and turns on the forward/reverse command. When the unwinder axis A is not under the dancer control

(For the JOG operation of the unwinder axis B, replace A with B in the above description.)

Turret axis JOG operation When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the operation of turret [Forward]/[Reverse] sets the JOG speed of the turret and turns on the forward/reverse command. The turret unlock output is on. Operation mode [Manual]

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Operation mode setting Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Automatic operation mode switching Switches the operation mode to [Auto] when the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The turret lock of the auxiliary is [Lock]. The touch roll of the auxiliary is [Up]. The cutter of the auxiliary is [Up]. The unwinder running axis is in the servo-on status. The turret axis is in the servo-on status.

(2) Manual operation mode switching Switches the operation mode to [Manual] when the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto]

Automatic mode initialization

When the following condition is satisfied, Waiting reel ready is turned to [OFF] and Reel change status is changed to [Waiting status]. The operation status is initialized.

Reel change status bit creation

Creates each bit for the initialization mode, waiting mode, turret turning mode, and reel change mode from Reel change status.

Creation the data for display Creates Reel change status and Unwinding reel status running axis as the data for the GOT display.

Prealarm determination Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Turns on the prealarm (Y33) when the following condition is satisfied. The unwinder running axis diameter is equal to or smaller than the turn notification diameter.

(2) Turns off the prealarm (Y33) when any of the following conditions is satisfied. Reel change status [Turret turning] Prealarm [Reset]

Reel status check Turns on the reel change start condition satisfaction when the following conditions are satisfied. The diameter of the unwinder running axis is equal to or smaller than the diameter at reel change start. [Reel change forced execution] is on.

Turret turning start determination

Performs the following processing (1) to (5). (1) Operation mode Auto, Turret turning start Turns the reel change status to [Turret turning] when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The reel change start condition satisfaction is on. [Waiting reel ready] is on. The operation mode is [Auto]. The line speed reaches the set velocity.

(2) Operation mode [Auto], unwinder waiting axis preparing OFF Turns on the turret axis rotation disabling when the following condition is satisfied. Waiting reel ready is off.

(3) [Reel change start] ON Turns on the reel change start output (Y34) when the following condition is satisfied. The reel change start condition satisfaction is on.

(4) [Reel change start] OFF Turns off the reel change start output (Y34) when any of the following conditions is satisfied. Start signal is [Reset]. Reel change operation completion

(5) Reel change operation start determination Turns on the reel change operation start when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The reel change start condition satisfaction is on. Waiting reel ready is on.

Creation of turret axis rotation start request

Turns on the turret axis rotation start request when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Reel change status [Turret turning] The turret axis is in the servo-on status. The turret axis rotation completion position arrival is off.

Processing Description

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 177

17

Turret turning command control

Performs the following processing (1) to (5). (1) Turret turning command ON Turns on the turret axis auto rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Reel change status [Turret turning] Turret unlock output ON The turret axis rotation completion position arrival is off. Operation mode [Auto] Turret axis in servo-on

(2) Turret A-axis position movement Turns on the turret axis forward rotation A-axis position request on any of the following conditions. The turret axis auto rotation command is on and the unwinder running axis is the running axis B. Turret: FWD turning [A-axis position] with the operation mode [Manual]

(3) Turret B-axis position movement Turns on the turret axis forward B-axis position request on any of the following conditions. The turret axis auto rotation command is on and the unwinder running axis is the running axis A. Turret: FWD turning [B-axis position] with the operation mode [Manual]

(4) Turret stop Turns on the turret axis positioning stop request on any of the following conditions. Operation mode [Manual] Turret [STOP]

(5) Creation of the data for display Creates the current angle of the turret.

Calculation of the waiting axis diameter

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Calculation of the unwinder waiting axis diameter Calculates the initial winding diameter of the unwinding waiting axis using the unwinder axis diameter calculation FB when the following conditions are satisfied. Creates the rotation speed per 1ms of the unwinder axis, and turns on the unwinder axis diameter calculation completion. Roll edge detection (X30) is on.

(2) Diameter calculation err ON Turns on Diameter calculation err on any of the following conditions. The initial winding diameter of the unwinder waiting axis is smaller than the minimum roll diameter. The initial winding diameter of the unwinder waiting axis is larger than the maximum reel diameter. The unwinder axis initial diameter calculation error is on.

(3) Diameter calculation err OFF Turns off the diameter calculation error when the following conditions are satisfied. The reel change error reset is on.

Touch roll & cutter down position calculation

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Touch roll operation position calculation Creates the position calculation with the touch roll operation position correction and the one with the cutter operation position correction with using the touch roll operation position calculation FB when the following condition is satisfied. The unwinder axis diameter calculation completion is on.

(2) Cutter angle calculation err ON Turn on the cutter angle calculation error when the following condition is satisfied. The FB error of touch roll & cutter down position calculation is on.

(3) Cutter angle calculation err OFF Turn off the cutter angle calculation error when the following condition is satisfied. The reel change error reset is on.

Pre-drive request creation Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Pre-drive command ON Turns on the pre-drive command when the following condition is satisfied. The unwinder axis diameter calculation completion is on.

(2) Pre-drive command OFF Turns off the pre-drive command when the following condition is satisfied. The reel change completion is on.

Unwinder axis A winding diameter setting (Unwinder axis B winding diameter setting)

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Unwinder waiting axis diameter setting Sets the unwinder waiting axis initial winding diameter to the diameter of the unwinder axis A and turns on the unwinder axis A initial setting completion when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The pre-drive command is on. The unwinder running axis is B-axis.

(2) Hold roll diameter Turns on the unwinder axis A current roll diameter hold when the following condition is satisfied. The pre-drive command is on.

(3) Unwinder running axis diameter setting Sets the initial unwinder diameter to the diameter of the unwinder axis A when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Initial winding diameter of the unwinder setting [Winding diameter] The unwinder running axis is the unwinder axis A.

(For the unwinder axis B winding diameter setting, reverse A and B in the description above.)

Processing Description

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Unwinder axis A start command creation (Unwinder axis B start command creation)

Performs the following processing (1) to (5). (1) Start dancer control Turns on the unwinder axis A rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The dancer control is [ON]. The unwinder running axis is A-axis. The unwinder axis A rotation command is off. Unwinder axis A servo ON

(2) Pre-drive start Turns on the unwinder axis A rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The unwinder axis A initial setting completion is on. Operation mode [Auto] The unwinder running axis is B-axis. The dancer control start is on. Unwinder axis A servo ON

(3) Unwinder axis A rotation command is held in itself when the operation mode is [Auto]. Turns on the unwinder axis A rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The unwinder axis A rotation command is on. Operation mode [Auto] The unwinder running axis is A-axis. The dancer control start is on. Unwinder axis A servo ON

(4) Operation with the operation mode [Manual] Turns on the unwinder axis A rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The dancer control is [ON]. The unwinder axis A rotation command is on. Operation mode [Manual] The unwinder running axis is A-axis. Unwinder axis A servo ON

(5) Unwinder axis A rotation command OFF with the operation mode [Auto] Turns off the unwinder axis A rotation command when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The reel change completion is on. Operation mode [Auto] The unwinder running axis is B-axis.

(For the unwinder axis B start command creation, replace A with B, B with A in the description above.)

Creation of the unwinder waiting axis in velocity information

Turns on the pre-drive command when the following condition is satisfied. The speed of the waiting axis reaches the pre-driving speed.

Creation of the turret turning completion information

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Turret axis rotation completion Turns on the turret axis rotation completion position arrival when the following condition is satisfied. Turret axis positioning completion

(2) Turret axis rotation completion Turns on the turret axis rotation completion when the following conditions are satisfied. The turret axis rotation completion position arrival is on. The turret unlock output is off. The turret axis auto rotation command is off. Reel change status [Turret turning]

(3) Reel change operation determination Turn the operation mode to [Reel change status] when every following condition is satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The turret axis rotation completion is on. The calculation completion in the turret axis rotation is on. The pre-drive in velocity is on. The reel change operation start is on. Reel change status [Turret turning]

Tape detection check Turns on the tape error detection when the following condition is satisfied. Tape sensor detection (X31) does not turn on even though the unwinder waiting axis rotates once after the reel change status

becomes [Reel change status].

Creation of the touch roll operation command

Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Tape detection position record Records the unwinder waiting axis position as the tape detection position for the touch roll when the following condition is satisfied. Tape sensor detection (X31) turns on for the first time after becoming the reel change status.

(2) Touch roll operation Turns on the auto touch roll down when the following condition is satisfied. Angle rotation of the unwinder waiting axis from the tape detection position for the touch roll with the touch roll operation

position correction

Processing Description

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 179

18

Cutter operation Performs the following processing from (1) to (3). (1) Paste / Cut warning and cutter operation Turns on the Paste / Cut warning and the auto cutter down when the following condition is satisfied. The auto touch roll down is on. Tape sensor detection (X31) does not turn on even though the unwinder waiting axis rotates twice from the tape sensor

detection position for the touch toll. (2) Cutter operation Turns on the auto cutter down when the following conditions are satisfied. The auto touch roll down is on. Tape sensor detection (X31) turns on within two rotations of the unwinder waiting axis (unwinder axis B) from the tape sensor

detection position for the touch roll. Angle rotation of the unwinder waiting axis from the tape sensor detection position for the touch roll position with the cutter

operation position correction (3) Cutter operation completion Turns on the cutter operation completion when the following conditions are satisfied. The unwinder axis (unwinder axis B) rotates for 0.9 after the auto cutter down becomes on.

Reel change operation completion determination

The reel change completion turns on when the following condition is satisfied. The cutter operation completion is on.

Creation of the unwinder axis selection information

Changes the unwinder running axis to the unwinder waiting axis, and the unwinder waiting axis to the running axis. The reel change completion is on.

Creation of the unwinder axis diameter

Creates the current value of the unwinder diameter of the unwinder running axis.

Creation of the unwinder waiting axis diameter

Creates the current value of the unwinder waiting axis diameter.

Creation of the unwinder axis velocity

Creates the current unwinder rotation speed of the unwinder running axis.

Creation of the unwinder waiting axis angle information

Creates the angle of the unwinder waiting axis.

Creation of the unwinder waiting axis stop information

Turns on the unwinder waiting axis stop when the following conditions are satisfied. The speed of the unwinder waiting axis is 0.

PID control setting of the unwinder axis

Performs the following processing. Sets the PID gain of the unwinder running axis as the setting value from the GOT. Set 0 to the PID gain of the unwinder running axis. (The PID operation is not performed.)

Reel replacement completion determination

Turns on the reel change operation start and turns the operation mode to [Initialization] when all of the following conditions are satisfied. The reel change completion is on. The unwinder waiting axis stop is on.

Request of the line stop at an error occurrence

Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Line stop with the operation mode [Auto] Turns on the reel change error line stop when any of the following condition is satisfied and the operation mode is [Auto]. The turret axis rotation disabling is on. The cutter angle calculation error is on. The diameter calculation error in on. The tape detect error is on. The unwinder axis A servo error is on. The unwinder axis B servo error is on. The turret axis servo error is on.

(2) Line stop with the operation mode [Manual] Turns on the reel change error line stop every following condition is satisfied. The diameter of the unwinder running axis becomes equal to or smaller than the diameter at reel change start. Operation mode [Manual]

Reset error Performs the following processing (1) and (2). (1) Reel change error reset Turns on the reel change error reset when the following condition is satisfied. Reel change error [Reset]

(2) Reel change warning reset Turns on the reel change warning reset when the following condition is satisfied. Reel change warning [Reset]

Processing Description

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Turret axis operation Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Turret axis home position setting Sets the home position of the turret axis and the turret turning speed when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Turret: Home position setting [Execution]

(2) Turret axis positioning command Sets the turret turning speed, sets the turret target position to 0, and starts positioning when the following condition is satisfied. The turret axis forward rotation A-axis position request is on.

Sets the turret turning speed, sets the turret target position to 180, and starts positioning when the following condition is satisfied. The turret axis forward rotation B-axis position request is on.

(3) Turret axis stop command Sends the positioning stop command to the turret axis when the following condition is satisfied. The turret axis positioning stop request is on.

Creation of the auxiliary operation command

Performs the following processing (1) to (3). (1) Turret unlock output (Y30) control Performs the following processing from 1) to 4). 1) Manual ON Turns on the turret unlock output (Y30) when all the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] AuxiliaryTurret lock [Unlock] operation

2) Auto ON Turns on the turret unlock output (Y30) when all the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] Operation state [Turret turning] The turret axis rotation start request is on.

3) Manual OFF Turns off Turret unlock output (Y30) when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Turret lock [Lock] operation

4) Auto OFF Turns off the turret unlock output (Y30) when every following condition is satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] Operation state [Turret turning] The turret axis rotation completion position arrival is on.

(2) Touch roll down output (Y31) control Performs the following processing from 1) to 4). 1) Manual ON Turns on the touch roll down output (Y31) when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Touch roll [Down] operation

2) Auto ON Turns on the touch roll down output (Y31) when all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The auto touch roll down is on.

3) Manual OFF Turns off the touch roll down output (Y31) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Touch roll [Up] operation

4) Auto OFF Turns off the touch roll down output (Y31) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The auto touch roll down is off.

(3) Cutter down output (Y32) control Performs the following processing from 1) to 4). 1) Manual ON Turns on the cutter roll down output (Y32) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Cutter [Down] operation

2) Auto ON Turns on the cutter roll down output (Y32) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The auto cutter down is on.

3) Manual OFF Turns off the cutter roll down output (Y32) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Cutter [Up] operation

4) Auto OFF Turns off the cutter roll down output (Y32) all of the following conditions are satisfied. Operation mode [Auto] The auto cutter down is off.

Processing Description

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 181

18

WinderControlReelChange (Tension control main processing: for reel change) The program for the reel change is added to the WinderControl program.

Main axis control (Main Axis Control) Refer to "Page 150 Main axis control".

Unwinder axis control Two axes, the unwinding running axis and unwinding waiting axis, are controlled. The ReelChange program performs the processing for switching the two axes.

Rewinder axis control (Rewinder Axis Control) Refer to "Page 152 Rewinder axis control".

Edge position axis control (Edge Position Axis Control) Refer to "Page 153 Edge position axis control".

Web break detection (Web Break Detect) Refer to "Page 153 Web break detection".

PreOperationReelChange (Preparing operation, line operation control) The program for the reel change is added to the PreOperation program.

Simple Motion module start processing (Simple Motion Module Start Process) Refer to "Page 154 Simple Motion module start processing".

Servo ON processing (Servo ON Processing) When Preparing operation (bOpeReady) turned on in the GOT screen, all axes (Axis 1 to 6) changes to servo ON. For the unwinder axis and turret axis, the ReelChange program individually performs the servo ON processing.

Error reset processing of each axis (Error Reset Processing) Reset errors of the axis used.

Line operation start processing (Line Operation Processing, Line Operation Start/Stop Processing)

"The reel change line stop request is off" of the ReelChange program is added as a line start condition of the PreOperation program.

HMI_IFReelChange (Touch panel I/O processing) The processing for displaying data related to the reel change such as the turn notification diameter setting and JOG operation on the GOT screen to the HMI_IF program.

UnWinderGainChange (Unwinder axis gain change) Refer to "Page 157 UnWinderGainChange (Unwinder axis gain change)".

FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement) Refer to "Page 158 FrictionTorqueMeasurement (Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement)".

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

ExamplePrgReelChange FB

CalcTouchRollCutterAngle (Touch roll & cutter operating angle calculation) Name CalcTouchRollCutterAngle

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB detects the tape position and calculates the rotation angle of the unwinder axis where the touch roll and cutter start

operating.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Description language ST language

Number of steps 221 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The following shows the I/O values for this FB.

L: Touch roll - Cutting point distance This distance is between the contact point of the unwinder axis and the touch roll and the cutting point of the cutter. This distance is A in the figure. : Tape detection sensor installation angle This angle is between the contact point of the unwinder axis and the touch roll and the tape detection sensor detection point of the adhesion tape of the unwinder axis. : Cutter operation angle This angle is between the detection point of the tape detection sensor and the operation point of the cutter. One revolution - : Touch roll operation angle This angle is between the detection point of the tape detection sensor and the operation point of the touch roll.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Pulse-execution type

Restrictions and precautions

Execution command

Distance between touch roll and cutter

Detection sensor installation angle

Roll diameter

Executing

Normal completion

Error completion

Error code

Touch roll operation angle

Cutter operation angle

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eRollOperatAngle :E

o_eCutOperatAngle :E

B: i_bEN

E: i_eCutterDis

E: i_eTapeSensorAngle

E: i_eDiaVal

CalcTouchRollCutterAngle

L

Cutter cutting point Contact point of the unwinder axis and touch roll

Tape detection sensor detection point

Rotational direction of the unwinder axis

A

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 183

18

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started Output labels

*2 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Distance between touch roll and cutter

i_eCutterDis Single precision real number

0.0<= Distance between the touch roll and cutter [mm]

Detection sensor installation angle

i_eTapeSensorAngle Single precision real number

0.0 to 360.0 Tape detection sensor installation angle to the touch roll [degree]

Roll diameter i_eDiaVal Single precision real number

0.0< Waiting axis roll diameter [mm]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*2

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal completion o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the processing is normally completed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit When this device is on, it indicates that an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Touch roll operation angle

o_eRollOperatAngle Single precision real number

Handling 360 degrees as 1, return the value obtained by the formula "360 degrees - " in the function description figure.

Cutter operation angle o_eCutOperatAngle Single precision real number

Handling 360 degrees as 1, return the value of in the function description figure.

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

DiaCalcTurretAngle (Roll diameter calculation (turret angle method)) Name DiaCalcTurretAngle

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB calculates the roll diameter of the waiting axis from the turret turning angle at the reel change operation.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Description language ST language

Number of steps 223 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description The following shows the I/O values for this FB.

L: Detection sensor distance This distance is between the roll edge detection sensor and the turret axis. This distance must be the same as the distance between the turret axis and waiting axis. : Detection sensor installation angle This angle is between the fixed position of the waiting axis and the roll diameter detection sensor, handling the turret axis as the top. : Rotation angle where the roll edge has approached the detection sensor r: Roll radius This value can be obtained by the formula "r = 2(L sin ((-)/2)))" because the roll radius is handled as the base of an isosceles triangle with the turret axis as the top. The roll diameter is 2r.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Pulse-execution type

Restrictions and precautions

Execution command

Detection sensor distance

Detection sensor installation angle

Roll edge detection angle

Executing

Normal completion

Error completion

Error code

Roll diameter

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

o_eDiaVal :E

B: i_bEN

E: i_eSensorDis

E: i_eSensorAngle

E: i_eDetectionAngle

DiaCalcTurretAngle

Waiting axis

L

L

Turret turning direction

Roll edge detection sensor detection point

Turret axis

L

Roll edge detection sensor detection point

r

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 185

18

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started Output labels

*2 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is stopped.

Detection sensor distance

i_eSensorDis Single precision real number

1.0 to 5000.0 Distance between the roll edge detection sensor and turret axis [mm]

Detection sensor installation angle

i_eSensorAngle Single precision real number

1.0 to 179.0 Degree between the waiting axis and roll edge detection sensor [degree]

Roll edge detection angle

I_eDetectionAngle Single precision real number

1.0 to 179.0 Angle at the roll edge detection [degree]

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*2

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal completion o_bOK Bit When this device is on, it indicates that the processing is normally completed.

Error completion o_bErr Bit When this device is on, it indicates that an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Roll diameter o_eDiaVal Single precision real number

The calculation result of the roll diameter is stored. [mm]

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Operation procedure

Start/stop procedure Start the operation by following the steps below. (For the function details of each screen, refer to "Page 215 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES".)

1. Write project data to the PLC CPU and GOT and start the system. Touch the [Operation monitor] switch.

2. Touch the [ON] switch of Preparing operation. Turning on of Preparing operation sets all axis (including the turret axis and unwinding waiting axis) in the servo-on status and starts the main axis in the speed control mode. The initial value of the unwinding running axis is A-axis.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 187

18

3. Return to the start screen and touch the [Reel change operating status] switch.

4. Touch the [Execution] switch of Home position setting to set the initial position of the turret axis, and touch the [Auto] switch of Operation mode.

5. Return to the start screen and touch the [Operation monitor] switch.

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

6. Input the winding diameter of A-axis as the initial winding diameter in the unwinder settings. Touching the [Winding Diameter] switch sets the winding diameter of the unwinder axis.

7. Also, input the rewinder axis winding diameter as the initial winding diameter in the rewinder settings. Set the rewinder axis winding diameter with the [Winding Diameter] switch.

8. Touch the [ON] switch of Dancer control. Turning on of Dancer control starts the unwinder axis in the speed control mode and moves the dancer to the set position.

9. Touch the [ON] switch of Tension control. Turning on of Tension control starts the rewinder axis in the torque control mode and sets the tension setting value as the set tension.

10. Touch the [START] switch of Line operation. The operation starts at the set line speed and the edge position control starts in the speed control mode.

11. The line operation stops when the [STOP] switch of Line operation is touched or the rewinder diameter reaches the last rewinder diameter.

When the [STOP] switch of Line operation is touched or the rewinder diameter reaches the last rewinder diameter.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 189

19

Reel change operation Perform the reel change of the unwinder axis by the following procedure.

Switch the operation mode to "Auto" before the reel change operation.

1. Touch the [Reel change operating status] switch on the start screen.

2. Prepare the unwinding waiting axis for operation and touch the [ON] switch of Waiting reel ready.

3. When the diameter of the unwinding running axis reaches the turn notification diameter, the PreAlarm lamp turns on. Touching the [Reset] switch of PreAlarm turns off this lamp.

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

4. The reel change is started when the diameter of the unwinding running axis reaches the diameter at reel change start or the [Reel change forced execution] switch is touched. When the reel change is started, the PreAlarm lamp turns off and the Reel change start lamp turns on. Touching the [Reset] switch of Start signal turns off this lamp.

If the operation in step 2 has not been completed until this step, the turret does not rotate and the line operation is stopped. (The operation of when the [STOP] switch of Line operation on the Operation monitor screen is touched will be performed.)

5. The turret rotates, the unwinding waiting reel diameter, touch roll operation angle, and cutter operation angle are calculated, and then the waiting axis starts operating. When the calculation fails, the Diameter calculation err lamp or Cutter angle calculation err lamp turns on. The reel change operation is interrupted and the line operation is stopped when the turret rotation is completed.

6. When the turret rotation and acceleration of the waiting axis are completed, the touch roll and cutter operate in order and the reel change is performed. At the same time, the waiting axis performs the dancer control as the running axis. The running axis is changed to the waiting axis and decelerates to stop.

7. The [OFF] switch of Waiting reel ready turns on.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 191

19

Manual operation On the Reel change operating status screen, turning on the [Manual] switch of Operation mode enables the manual operation. "Manual" is set after the system is started. When "Manual" is selected, the JOG operation, servo ON/OFF, and auxiliary operation of the unwinding waiting axis and turret axis are available.

Reel change operating status screen

(1) Touch the [Manual] switch of Operation mode to turn on the manual mode. (2) The servo ON/OFF operation of each axis can be performed. When the operation mode is "Manual", the servo ON/OFF operation can be enabled. Turning on of Preparing operation on the Operation monitor screen sets all axis in the servo-on status. Turning off it sets all axis in the servo-off status. (3) The rotating operation of the turret can be performed. When the [A-axis position] switch is turned on, the turret rotates forward to move A-axis to the running axis position (dancer operation position). When the [B-axis position] switch is turned on, the turret rotates forward to move B-axis to the running axis position. (4) The JOG operation of each axis can be performed. The JOG operation of the turret axis cannot be performed when the turret has been locked. (5) Each auxiliary operation can be performed.

(1)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(3)

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Reel change setting screen

(6) Select the axis to perform the dancer control. The selected axis is displayed as the unwinder axis on the Operation monitor screen.

(6)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 193

19

Operating condition of each function operation switch Each function operation switch is enabled under the following condition.

Reel change setting screen

No. Switch name Operating condition (1) Unwinding axis select [A-axis]/[B-axis] Operation mode [Manual]

(1)

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change

5

Reel change operating status screen

No. Switch name Operating condition (1) Reel change warning [Reset] Always enabled

Reel change error [Reset]

(2) Reel change: Operation mode [Auto] Turret lock [Lock] Touch roll [Up] Cutter [Up] All axes are in the servo-on status.

Reel change: Operation mode [Manual] Always enabled

(3) Turret: FWD turning [A-axis position] The turret axis is in the servo-on status. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Turret lock [Unlock]

Turret: FWD turning [B-axis position]

Turret: FWD turning [STOP] Always enabled

(4) Turret: Home position setting [Execution] The turret axis is in the servo-on status. Operation mode [Manual]

(5) JOG operation: A-axis [Forward]/[Reverse] A-axis is in the servo-on status. Running axis [B-axis]

JOG operation: B-axis [Forward]/[Reverse] B-axis is in the servo-on status. Running axis [A-axis]

JOG operation: Turret [Forward]/[Reverse] The turret axis is in the servo-on status. Operation mode [Manual] Auxiliary: Turret lock [Unlock]

(6) Servo ON/OFF: A-axis Operation mode [Manual] Running axis [B-axis]

Servo ON/OFF: B-axis Operation mode [Manual] Running axis [A-axis]

Servo ON/OFF: Turret Operation mode [Manual] Operation monitor screen: Preparing operation [ON]

(7) Auxiliary: Turret lock [Unlock]/[Lock] Operation mode [Manual]

Auxiliary: Touch roll [Down]/[Up]

Auxiliary: Cutter [Down]/[Up]

(1)

(6)

(3)

(4)

(2)

(5)

(7)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.4 Reel Change 195

19

5.5 Inverter Control specifications The tension control is started by a start signal and continuously operates until the diameter of the rewind web material reaches the set rewinding diameter.

Program configuration The processing and interfaces required for the inverter control are added to the [Basic] program. This application program does not have maintenance functions, such as home position return and JOG operation. Create the functions as needed.

Language The following languages are used in this program. Program comment: English Label comment: Japanese, English, Chinese (Simplified)

List of programs

Item Unwinder axis Main axis Rewinder axis Edge position axis

Inverter Servo Inverter Servo Axis number 2 4

Station number 17 2 18 4

Control mode Velocity Velocity Torque Velocity

Detector Dancer roll Tension detector Edge sensor

Tension gain auto tuning

Winding diameter calculation Web thickness integration method

Feeding length method

Taper tension None Table method

Direction Upper unwinding Upper rewinding

Inertia compensation, friction compensation

Control cycle 1.0ms (RD77GF)

Program name Description Execution type Describing method

INVInitial Initial parameter setting Initial ST

INVWinderControl Tension control main processing Main axis control Unwinder axis control (speed control) Rewinder axis control (torque control) Edge position axis control Web break detection

Event FBD

INVPreOperation Preparing operation, line operation control Servo ON/OFF Reset error Start line operation

Scan FBD

INVHMI_IF Touch panel I/O processing Scan ST

INVFrictionTorqueMeasurement Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement Fixed cycle (5 ms) FBD

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

FB CNV_TensionControl_R (Refer to "Page 47 FB LIBRARY".)

ExamplePrgCtrl (Refer to "Page 213 ExamplePrgCtrl FB".)

INVExample (Refer to "Page 206 INVExample FB".)

Item FB name Description Program Activation CNV_Activation License activation INVPreOperation

Tension control CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl Dancer feedback velocity control INVWinderControl

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl Tension sensor feedback torque control INVWinderControl

Velocity generator

CNV_LineVelocityGenerator Line velocity generator INVWinderControl

Roll diameter calculation

CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method) INVWinderControl

CNV_DiaCalcFeed Roll diameter calculation (Feeding length method) INVWinderControl

Torque compensation

CNV_WinderInertiaTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation INVWinderControl

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque Friction compensation value calculation INVWinderControl

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement Friction torque measurement INVFrictionTorqueMeasurement

Tuning function CNV_TaperTension Taper tension calculation INVWinderControl

CNV_PIDControl PID control (with tension PI gain auto tuning) INVWinderControl

Additional function

CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge position control INVWinderControl

CNV_WebBreakDetect Web break detection INVWinderControl

Filters STD_Lowpass1 Low-pass filter INVWinderControl

STD_AverageValueFilter Moving average filter INVWinderControl

STD_Limiter Limiter INVWinderControl

STD_TableInterpolation Table interpolation INVWinderControl

FB name Description Describing method

Program

MotionReady Simple Motion module start processing ST INVPreOperation

ServoON Servo ON processing ST INVPreOperation

MotionErrorReset Error reset processing ST INVPreOperation

DancerPos Dancer position A/D value conversion processing ST INVWinderControl

TensionAD Tension detector A/D value conversion processing ST INVWinderControl

WinderSpdMonitor Real rotation speed display processing (rewinder axis) ST INVWinderControl

EdgePos A/D value conversion processing at the edge sensor detection position ST INVWinderControl

INVServoON Inverter servo ON processing ST INVPreOperation

INVErrorReset Inverter error reset processing ST INVPreOperation

INVMonitor Inverter torque monitor processing ST INVFrictionTorqueMeasurement

INVSpdTrqModeChg Inverter speed control/torque control switchover processing ST INVFrictionTorqueMeasurement

FB name Description Describing method

Program

CCIEFINVSpdIF CC-Link IE Field inverter speed control interface ST INVWinderControl

CCIEFINVTrqIF CC-Link IE Field inverter torque interface ST INVWinderControl

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 197

19

Parameter

Parameter setting of the inverter For the inverter, the following parameters need to be set. For the setting of the inverter, refer to the following. FR-A800-GF INSTRUCTION MANUAL (STARTUP) FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)

Number Name Setting value Settings

Unwinder axis (speed control)

Rewinder axis (torque control/ speed control)

7 Acceleration time 0

8 Deceleration time 0

9 Electronic thermal 20.8A

71 Applied motor 70 Set in SF-PR.

80 Motor capacity 5.5 5.5Kw

81 Number of motor poles 4 4 poles

144 Speed setting switchover 104 Set in Motor with 4 poles, speed setting.

180 RL terminal function selection 23 Set in the pre-excitation (servo-on) input command.

185 LOG terminal function selection 26 26: Control mode switch

191 SU terminal function selection 33 Set in the RY2 (Preparing operation completion 2) output.

340 Communication startup mode selection

10 Network operation mode at startup

369 Number of encoder pulses 2048

434 Network number (CC-Link IE Field)

1

435 Station number (CC-Link IE Field)

17 18

541 Frequency command sign selection

1 Setting range: Use within -3276.8 to 3276.7r/min.

800 Control method selection 0 2 0: Speed control, 2: Speed control - Torque control switchover

802 Pre-excitation selection 1 0 0: Zero speed control, 1: Servo lock

804 Torque command source selection

5 Uses the setting value of Pr.805. By 0.01%

807 Speed limit selection 0 Uses the speed command setting value for the speed limit.

811 Set resolution switchover 1 Setting by 0.1r/min

1113 Speed limit method selection 9999 Speed limit mode 1

1114 Torque command reverse selection

0 Regardless of the operation command (STF/STR) of the inverter, the positive torque commands the operation of the forward rotation in power running mode/reverse rotation in regenerative mode, and the negative torque commands the operation of the forward rotation in regenerative mode/ reverse rotation in power running mode).

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

User device setting (global label setting) For this application program example, the following devices are assigned for the link refresh of CC-Link IE Field of the inverter. These devices are assigned to the following global labels and used in the inverter interface FB. When changing the device for the link refresh, change the following setting as well.

Structure definition For the structure, define the device of the link refresh setting. The size of the arrangements of the data type of each label is the device points of the link refresh setting. The following table shows the setting of this sample project. Structure name: stRemoteReg

Global label definition The global label is defined with using the structure set above. With GX Works3, set each item of the following labels. Label name: Input "G_stLinkIEF". Data type: Select the structure "stRemoteReg". Class: Select "VAR_GLOBAL". Assignment (device/label): Set as follows along with the element of the structure in the detailed setting.

*1 RWr0 to RWr18F are assigned to W0 to W18F, and RWw0 to RWw18F are assigned to W190 to W31F. Because the refresh setting requires only the inverter, only RWr90 to RWr18F, RWw90 to RWw18F are set for this application program.

Device Use range B 0 to FF

W 0 to 31F

Label name Data type Settings bnRX Bit (0..n) The number of elements in arrangement is the number of RX points. 128 points (0..127)

for this application program example

bnRY Bit (0..n) The number of elements in arrangement is the number of RY points. 128 points (0..127) for this application program example

unRWr Word (unsigned) (0..n) The number of elements in arrangement is the number of RWr points. 400 points (0..399) for this application program example

unRWw Word (unsigned) (0..n) The number of elements in arrangement is the number of RWw points. 400 points (0..399) for this application program example

Label name Device Settings bnRX First device of RX "B0" for this application program example

bnRY First device of RY "B80" for this application program example

unRWr First device of RWr*1 "W0" for this application program example*1

unRWw First device of RWw*1 "W190" for this application program example*1

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 199

20

Program processing

INVInitial (Initial parameter setting) Set event task starts, each variable's initial value, and constants. Setting of execution cycle Setting of unwinder axis Setting of main axis Setting of rewinder axis Setting of edge position axis Web break detection parameter

INVWinderControl (Tension control main processing) The processing to control the inverter is added to the WinderControl program of the basic project.

Main axis control (Main Axis Control) Refer to "Page 150 Main axis control".

Unwinder axis control (Unwinder Axis Control) When Start dancer control (bUnwdDancerCtrl) turns on, the dancer feedback velocity control FB (CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl) is started. The dancer detection analog value is converted into a position, filtered with the moving average filter (10 ms), and input in the feedback value of the velocity control FB. The speed command is created to make the dancer position reach the target position. The created speed command is input to the inverter speed interface FB (CCIEFINVSpdIF), and controls the speed of the inverter. The inverter speed interface FB sends the position and speed of the unwinder to the roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method) FB. Every time the unwinder axis rotates, it decrements the thickness value and calculates the current winding diameter. The current winding diameter is input in the velocity control FB, and the velocity is controlled to make the circumferential velocity reach the line velocity.

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

Rewinder axis control (Rewinder Axis Control) When Start tension control of rewinder (bWdTensionCtrl) turns on, the tension sensor feedback torque control FB (CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl) is started. For the feedback value of the torque control FB, the tension detection analog value is converted into a tension value and filtered with the lowpass filter (10 ms). The roll diameter calculation (feeding length) FB receives the position and speed of the unwinder axis from the inverter torque control interface FB (CCIEFINVTrqIF) and calculates the current winding diameter based on the feeding amount of the main axis per rotation of the unwinder axis. The current winding diameter is input to the torque control FB, and the command torque of the set tension (current winding diameter/2) is created. The torque command to the rewinder axis is created from the command torque and the feed back value. The created torque command is input to the inverter torque control interface FB to control the torque of the inverter.

Edge position axis control (Edge Position Axis Control) Refer to "Page 153 Edge position axis control".

Web break detection (Web Break Detect) Refer to "Page 153 Web break detection".

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 201

20

INVPreOperation (Preparing operation, line operation control) The axis to be used for the PreOperation program of the basic project is changed to the inverter.

Simple Motion module start processing Always ON while the CPU is running

Servo ON processing of each axis When Preparing operation (bOpeReady) turned on in the GOT screen, the servo ON processing of each axis is performed.

Error reset processing of each axis

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

Line operation start processing When Start Line operation (bLineOpeStart) turns on in the GOT screen and the current rewinder diameter is equal to or smaller than the rewinder diameter for stopping line, the line operation starts.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 203

20

INVHMI_IF (Touch panel I/O processing) The processing for displaying the GOT screen is performed.

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the rewinder axis.

Tension setting for the simulator

Creates a torque monitor value.

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

INVFrictionTorqueMeasurement (Rewinder axis mechanical loss torque measurement) When the START switch (bWdFrTblMake) in the GOT screen is touched, the torque of the rewinder axis is measured without rolls installed (five points of up to the maximum rotation speed) and the torque table for mechanical loss torque compensation is created. At this time, the inverter starts the speed control operation, and the speed command for the measurement controls the inverter from the inverter speed interface FB (CCIEFINVSpdIF). The torque uses the torque monitor value acquired from the inverter.

Edge position axis status (wEgPosCtrlSvSt) Alarm: 2, Servo ON: 1, Servo OFF: 0

Indexes the start I/O number and axis number for specifying the buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module of the edge position axis.

*Un\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Pulse amount per rotation of rewinder/unwinder axis

Monitors the current value of the edge position axis.

Reads the backed up index register values.

Inputs the rated torque and gear ratio of the rewinder axis.

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 205

20

INVExample FB This FB is for using the MELSEC iQ-R simple motion converting FB library with FR-A800-GF. When FR-A800-GF is set to the speed control mode or torque control mode, it can be used in the following combinations with the converting FB library.

Converting library (CNV_TensionControl_R) compatible list

: FB that can be combined directly : Requires the signal unit conversion : FB which needs not to be combined

For each FB of CCIEFINVSpdIF, CCIEFINVTrqIF, the device set for link refresh must be assigned to the global label for the control of CC-Link IE Field of the inverter. Refer to the following and set the global label according to the refresh setting of the system to use. Page 199 User device setting (global label setting)

Item FB name Description Compatible FB

Speed control FB CCIEFINVSpdIF

Torque control FB CCIEFINVTrqIF

Tension control CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl Tension sensor feedback velocity control

CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl Dancer feedback velocity control

CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl Tension sensor feedback torque control

CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl Tension sensorless torque control

CNV_DrawCtrl Draw control

Velocity generator CNV_LineVelocityGenerator Line velocity generator

Roll diameter calculation CNV_DiaCalcVelocity Roll diameter calculation (Velocity ratio method)

CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method)

CNV_DiaCalcFeed Roll diameter calculation (Feeding length method)

Torque compensation CNV_WinderInertiaTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation

CNV_InertiaCalc Load inertia ratio calculation

CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTorque Inertia compensation torque calculation (Motor inertia ratio)

CNV_WinderFrictionTorque Friction compensation value calculation

CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement Friction torque measurement

Tuning function CNV_WinderGainChange Gain change

CNV_TaperTension Taper tension

CNV_PIDControl PID control (with Tension PI Gain auto tuning)

Additional function CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge Position Control

CNV_WebBreakDetect Web break detection

6 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

Rotation direction setting Set WinderType depending on the equipment. To switch an equipment to upper unwinding lower unwinding or upper rewinding lower rewinding, switch WinderType to 0 2 or 1 3. Input a negative (-) speed command to the line speed input to perform rewinding with the unwinder axis or unwinding with the rewinder axis.

Setting Installation direction of the motor

Equipment operation

WinderType: 0 (Forward unwinding)

WinderType: 1 (Forward rewinding)

WinderType: 2 (Backward unwinding)

WinderType: 3 (Backward rewinding)

Upper unwinding Lower unwinding

Lower unwinding Upper unwinding

Lower rewinding Upper rewinding

Upper rewinding Lower rewinding

Lower unwinding Upper unwinding

Upper unwinding Lower unwinding

Upper rewinding Lower rewinding

Lower rewinding Upper rewinding

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 207

20

CCIEFINVSpdIF (CC-Link IE Field inverter speed control interface) Name CCIEFINVSpdIF

Function overview Item Description Function overview Performs speed control with the inverter.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77GF

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Description language ST language

Number of steps 1325 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description Sends the velocity command to the inverter specified by the setting of winder station. The inverter needs to be set to the speed control. Returns the winder velocity controlled by the inverter and the number of cumulative pulses of the encoder mounted to the motor axis as the current position of the winder.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Any of FR-A8AP/FR-A8APR/FR-A8AL/FR-A8TP is required as the built-in encoder connection option. The inverter is used for the vector control with encoder. The following parameter setting is required.

Execution command

Velocity command

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder station

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

Winder velocity

Current position of winder

o_eWinderVelocity :E

o_dWinderPosActVal :D

B: i_bEN

E: i_eCommandVelocity

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderStation

CCIEFINVSpdIF

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder station

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderStation :DUT

No. Name Setting value Remarks 144 Speed setting switchover 100 + number

of motor poles

RL terminal function selection 23

191 SU terminal function selection

Set the parameter to the rotation speed setting.

Set the parameter to the pre-excitation input command.

Set the parameter to the RY2 (Preparing operation completion 2) output.

541 Frequency command sign selection 1

180

33

Set the range within -3276.8 to 3276.7 r/min.

800 Control method selection 0: Speed control

811 Set resolution switchover 1

0

Unit setting of the speed setting value 0.1 r/min

802 Pre-excitation selection 1: Servo lock1

8 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started Output labels

*2 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops. *3 A conversion error occurs since it is not controlled with the ration speed but with the frequency inside the inverter.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*4 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit Executes the FB while it is on.

Velocity command i_eCommandVelocity Single precision real number

(-3276.8/gear ratio) to (3276.7/gear ratio)

Velocity command to the inverter [r/min] The gear ratio should be the value specified in the setting of winder control.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*2

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Winder velocity o_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Current value of winder velocity [r/min]*3

Current position of winder

o_dWinderPosActVal Double word [Signed] Current rotational position of the winder axis [Pulse]

Name Label name Data type Description Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the setting of winder control.

Setting of winder station

io_stWinderStation AXIS_REF Refer to the setting of winder station.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*4

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 207 Rotation direction setting")

Gear ratio eWinderGearRatio IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

PLG option specification

wINVPLGOption IN Word [Signed] 1, 2 Specifies the type of the built-in encoder connection option used by the inverter. 1: FR-A8AP/FR-A8APR/FR-A8AL (built-in option) 2: FR-A8TP (control terminal block option)

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*4

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 1 to 120 Used reading the axis number as the station number. The station number occupied in the motion mode cannot be used.

Start IO number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 209

21

CCIEFINVTrqIF (CC-Link IE Field inverter torque interface) Name CCIEFINVTrqIF

Function overview Item Description Function overview Performs torque control with the inverter.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77GF

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Description language ST language

Number of steps 1677 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description Sends the torque command and velocity limit to the inverter specified by the setting of winder station. Returns the winder velocity controlled by the inverter and the number of cumulative pulses of the encoder mounted to the motor axis as the current position of the winder. The inverter needs to be set in the torque control.

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Real-time execution

Restrictions and precautions

Any of FR-A8AP/FR-A8APR/FR-A8AL/FR-A8TP is required as the built-in encoder connection option. The inverter is used for the vector control with encoder. The following parameter setting is required.

Execution command

Torque command

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder station

Executing

Normal operation

Error completion

Error code

o_bENO :B

o_bOK :B

o_bErr :B

o_uErrId :UW

B: i_bEN

E: i_eCommandTorque

Velocity limit E: i_eVelocityLimit

DUT: io_stWinderControl

DUT: io_stWinderStation

CCIEFINVTrqIF

o_eWinderVelocity :E Winder velocity

Current position of windero_dWinderPosActVal :D

Setting of winder control

Setting of winder station

io_stWinderControl :DUT

io_stWinderStation :DUT

No. Name Setting value Remarks 144 Speed setting switchover 100 + number

of motor poles

RL terminal function selection 23

191 SU terminal function selection

Set the parameter to the rotation speed setting.

Set the parameter to the pre-excitation input command.

Set the parameter to the RY2 (Preparing operation completion 2) output.

541 Frequency command sign selection 1

180

33

Set the range within -3276.8 to 3276.7 r/min.

800 Control method selection 1: Torque control1

804 Torque command source selection 5 Use the setting value of Pr.805. By 0.01%

807 Speed limit selection Use the speed command setting value for the speed limit.

811 Set resolution switchover 1

0

Unit setting of the speed limit value 0.1 r/min

1113 Speed limit method selection 9999 Speed limit mode 1

1114 Torque command reverse selection 0 Regardless of the operation command (STF/STR) of the inverter, the positive torque command generates the (Forward rotation in power running mode/reverse rotation in regenerative mode, and the negative torque command generates the Reverse rotation in power running mode/forward rotation in regenerative mode).

0 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started Output labels

*2 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops. *3 A conversion error occurs since it is not controlled with the ration speed but with the frequency inside the inverter.

I/O labels

Setting of winder control (WINDER_REF structure)

Name Label name Data type Read timing*1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command i_bEN Bit Executes the FB while it is on.

Torque command i_eCommandTorque Single precision real number

(-3.2768*rated torque*gear ratio) to (3.2767*rated torque*gear ratio)

Torque command value for the inverter [Nm] (Motor axis conversion) The gear ratio and rated torque should be the values specified in the setting of winder control.

Velocity limit i_eVelocityLimit Single precision real number

(-3276.8/gear ratio) to (3276.7/ gear ratio)

Velocity limit value for the inverter [r/min] (Motor axis conversion) The gear ratio should be the value specified in the setting of winder control.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*2

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit Turns on while Execution command is on.

Normal operation o_bOK Bit Turns on while the FB is normally operating.

Error completion o_bErr Bit Turns on when an error has occurred in the FB.

Error code o_uErrId Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Winder velocity o_eWinderVelocity Single precision real number

Current value of winder velocity [r/min]*3

Current position of winder

o_dWinderPosActVal Double word [Signed] Current rotational position of the winder axis [Pulse]

Name Label name Data type Description Setting of winder control

io_stWinderControl WINDER_REF Refer to the setting of winder control.

Setting of winder station

io_stWinderStation AXIS_REF Refer to the setting of winder axis.

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*4

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Winding method wWinderType IN Word [Signed] 0 to 3 Rewinding/unwinding setting 0: Forward unwinding 1: Forward rewinding 2: Backward unwinding 3: Backward rewinding (For details, refer to "Page 207 Rotation direction setting")

Gear ratio eWinderGearRatio IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Gear ratio (Motor side/load side)

Rated torque eWinderRatedTrq IN Single precision real number

0.0 < Rated torque of motor [Nm]

Inverter PLG option specification

wINVPLGOption IN Word [Signed] 1, 2 Specifies the type of the built-in encoder connection option used by the inverter. 1: FR-A8AP/FR-A8APR/FR-A8AL (built-in option) 2: FR-A8TP (control terminal block option)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 211

21

Setting of winder axis (AXIS_REF structure)

*4 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Name Label name I/O Data type Read timing*4

Setting range

Initial value

Description

Axis number AxisNo IN Word [Unsigned] 1 to 120 Used reading the axis number as the station number. The station number occupied in the motion mode cannot be used.

Start IO number StartIO IN Word [Unsigned] 0H to FEH Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

2 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

5

ExamplePrgCtrl FB This section describes the FBs added for the inverter control. For the basic program example and common FBs, refer to "Page 159 ExamplePrgCtrl FB".

INVServoON RYn8, which is the remote IO output, is turned on in the inverter specified by the setting of winder station as the servo-on (pre- excitation) command. This FB receives the RY2 signal of the inverter from RXn3, which is the remote IO input, and sends it back as the servo-on status. For the inverter, the following parameters needs to be set. "[Pr.186] CS terminal function selection" = 23 "[Pr.191] SU terminal function selection" = 33

INVErrorReset Turning on the reset command turns on the error reset request (RY(n+3)A) in the inverter specified by the setting of winder station. When the inverter is not in the error status, the reset is not executed.

INVMonitor Acquires the monitor data specified by the monitor code of the inverter specified by the setting of winder station. For the format, such as the unit, of the monitor code and monitor data, refer to the following. FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)

Executing (Bit)

Servo ON status (Bit)

Execution command (Bit)

Setting of winder station (AXIS_REF)

Setting of winder station (AXIS_REF)

Reset (Bit)

Setting of winder station (AXIS_REF)

Monitor code (Word [Signed])

Execution command (Bit)

Monitor data (Word [Signed])

Executing (Bit)

5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter 213

21

INVSpdTrqModeChg Turns on RYn5, which is the remote IO output, in the inverter specified by the setting of winder station as the control mode switch (MC) command. For the inverter, the following parameters needs to be set. "[Pr.185] JOG terminal function selection" = 26 "[Pr.800] Control method selection" = 2, 102

Operation procedure The operation procedure is same as the following. Page 161 Operation procedure

Setting of winder station (AXIS_REF)

Mode change command (Bit)

Execution command (Bit) Executing (Bit)

4 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5.5 Inverter

6

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES Precautions

To utilize these screen examples for an actual system, sufficiently confirm that the screens will not cause system control problems on user's own responsibility. Examine the positions where interlock conditions are required in a target system and add them.

There are slight differences in color and layout between the actual screens and the screens described in this manual.

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 215

21

6.1 Screen Layout Screen transition (All screens) The following shows the screen transition of all screens. When a GOT is started, the start logo screen appears first. For details, refer to "Page 223 Start logo screen". After the start logo screen has appeared, the Home screen appears. However, when the GOT is started for the first time,

the Language Setting window screen appears after the start logo screen has appeared. For details of the operation of when the GOT is started for the first time, refer to "Page 223 Operation to be performed when the GOT is started for the first time".

For the screen transition common in all screens, refer to "Page 217 Screen transition (Common)".

When the Pattern Select/Register window screen or the Cursor information window screen has been displayed and the screen is switched to another main screen, the window screen will be closed and switched to the touched main screen.

Line operation setting

Graph

Cursor information Deletion confirmation

Result display

Operation monitor Unwinder setting Rewinder setting 1 Rewinder setting 2

Start logo screen

Home screen

Pattern Select/Register

Save confirmation

Main screen

Window screen

Explanatory note

Reel change setting Reel change operating status

6 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.1 Screen Layout

6

Screen transition (Common) The following shows the screen transition common in all screens. Touching the globe mark switch displays the Language Setting window screen for language switching. Touching the date and time display area displays the Clock Setting window screen. When a GOT system alarm has occurred, touching the system alarm message display area that is to be displayed at the

bottom of the screen displays the GOT system alarm reset window screen.

System alarm message display area

GOT system alarm reset

Language Setting

Clock Setting

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.1 Screen Layout 217

21

6.2 Basic Screen Layout The following shows the basic layout of a main screen.

(1) Title display area Displays the title bar. For details, refer to "Page 221 Title bar". (2) Date and time display area Displays the current date (upper side) and time (lower side). Touching this display area displays the Clock Setting window screen. For details of the Clock Setting window screen, refer to "Page 223 Clock Setting window screen". (3) Language setting area Touching the globe mark switch displays the Language Setting window screen. For details of the Language Setting window screen, refer to "Page 222 Language Setting window screen". (4) Function area Displays the screen of each function. For details, refer to "Page 224 Base Screen". (5) Main menu display area Displays the screen transition switches to display each main screen. For details of the main menu switches, refer to "Page 221 Main menu". (6) System alarm message display area

When a GOT system alarm occurs, a system alarm is displayed overlapping the bottom of the screen that is being displayed. For details of the GOT system alarms, refer to "Page 222 GOT system alarm".

(4) Function area

(1) Title display area (2) Date and time display area

(3) Language setting area

(6) System alarm message display area

(5) Main menu display area

8 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.2 Basic Screen Layout

6

6.3 Description of Common Items Descriptions of character colors The following table lists colors used for numerical values and characters displayed as setting values or current values.

Switch The following table lists switches used in common.

Character colors

Background colors

Description Application example

White Black Displays target data values. The values can be changed using the key windows to be displayed when the display area is touched. The addition/ subtraction switches can also be used to change the values.

Black Displays target data values. The values cannot be changed.

Display Details Touch this switch to display the Language Setting window screen.

Touch this switch to display the Clock Setting window screen.

Touch this switch to add a value to the numerical value to be input. Touch and hold this switch to continuously perform the operation.

Touch this switch to subtract a value from the numerical value to be input. Touch and hold this switch to continuously perform the operation.

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.3 Description of Common Items 219

22

Key window Use the following user creation key windows for inputting numerical values and characters. For types of the key windows, refer to the following.

Numerical value input Numerical values can be input using the numeric keypad (GOT-standard key window). The input range is displayed at the bottom of the input value area.

Character input Characters displayed on each switch can be input. To input a space, touch the "SP" switch. Touch the "abc" or "ABC" switch to switch the key window to the alphabet key windows for character input. Touch the "@" switch to switch the key window to the symbol key window for character input.

Uppercase alphabets + Numerical values/Lowercase alphabets + Numerical values

Symbols + Numerical values

Object Type of key window Window screen Numerical value input Decimal key window W-30010

Character input Uppercase alphabets + Numerical values W-30020

Lowercase alphabets + Numerical values W-30021

Symbols + Numerical values W-30022

0 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.3 Description of Common Items

6

Title bar The title bar is displayed as follows in all screens.

The title of the currently-displayed screen is displayed in (1). The date and time are displayed in (2). When the date and time display area is touched, the Clock Setting window screen

appears. On the window screen, year, month, date, hour, minute, and second can be changed. For details of the Clock Setting window screen, refer to "Page 223 Clock Setting window screen".

Touching the globe mark switch in (3) displays the Language Setting window screen. The display language can be switched. For details of the Language Setting window screen, refer to "Page 222 Language Setting window screen".

Main menu Touching a switch with a main screen name jumps to the corresponding screen. The blue switch indicates the screen being displayed.

Main menu 1

Main menu 2

Switch Description Touch this switch to return to the home screen.

Touch this switch to jump to each screen. When a switch other than the one of the screen being displayed is touched, the switch color changes to blue and the screen of the touched switch is displayed.

Touch this switch to return to the previous screen. Up to 10 previous screens are kept in the screen history.

Touch this switch to switch the screen to the main menu 2.

Touch this switch to switch the screen to the main menu 1.

(1) (3)(2)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.3 Description of Common Items 221

22

GOT system alarm If a GOT system alarm has occurred, a system alarm message is popped up at the bottom of the screen as follows. The system alarm message is displayed running from right to left of the screen at a low speed in the order of the occurrence date and time, comment, and detailed information. The GOT system alarm message is displayed in the language set in the Language Setting window screen. However, if no PLC CPU has been connected or the PLC CPU is off when the GOT is started, a GOT system alarm message is displayed in English.

When a system alarm has occurred, touching the system alarm message display area displays the GOT system alarm reset window screen.

Touch the [OK] switch when you reset the system alarm. The system alarm that cannot be reset is not cleared even though the [OK] switch is touched.

Touch the [Cancel] switch when you do not reset the system alarm. Even though the main screen is switched while the GOT system alarm reset window screen is being displayed, the GOT

system alarm reset window screen is not closed but still displayed.

Window screens common in all screens The following explains window screens common in all screens.

Language Setting window screen Switches the language displayed in the screen.

(1) Touch this switch to switch the language to Japanese. (2) Touch this switch to switch the language to English. (3) Touch this switch to switch the language to Chinese (Simplified).

While the Language Setting window screen is being displayed, switches in the main screen cannot be operated.

(1)

(3)

(2)

2 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.3 Description of Common Items

6

Clock Setting window screen Changes the current date and time.

(1) Date/time data addition switch Touching an addition switch (year, month, date, hour, minute, second) adds one to each value. (2) Date and time setting Sets the date and time (year, month, date, hour, minute, and second). The following shows the input range of each item. Year: 2000 to 2099, Month: 01 to 12, Date: 01 to 31 Hour: 00 to 23, Minute: 00 to 59, Second: 00 to 59 (3) Date/time data subtraction switch Touching a subtraction switch (year, month, date, hour, minute, and second) subtracts one from each value. (4) 0 Set switch Sets 0 for second. (5) [Set] switch Touching this switch sets the current date and time and closes the window screen. (6) [Cancel] switch Touching this switch closes the window screen without reflecting the set date and time.

If setting the date and time that does not exist in the date and time setting (Ex: 2015/2/30) is attempted, touching the [Set] switch closes the window screen without reflecting the set date and time. At that time, a GOT system alarm occurs and "Clock data input out of range" is displayed in the system alarm message display area.

6.4 When the GOT is Started Start logo screen In the start logo screen that is to be displayed when the GOT is started, the iQ Monozukuri logo appears at the center of the screen.

Operation to be performed when the GOT is started for the first time When the GOT is started for the first time, the Language Setting window screen appears after the start logo screen has appeared. Select a language. For details of the Language Setting window screen, refer to "Page 222 Language Setting window screen".

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5) (6)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.4 When the GOT is Started 223

22

6.5 Base Screen The following table lists base screens.

Home screen After the GOT is started, the Home screen appears first. Touch a switch to switch the screen to each screen.

(1) Title bar In the Home screen, the application package name, "CONVERTING" is displayed at the center of the title bar. (2) Operation monitor switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Operation monitor" screen. (3) Unwinder setting switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Unwinder setting" screen. (4) Rewinder setting 1 switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Rewinder setting 1" screen. (5) Rewinder setting 2 switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Rewinder setting 2" screen. (6) Line operation setting switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Line operation setting" screen. (7) Graph switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Graph" screen. (8) Reel change setting switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Reel change setting" screen. (9) Reel change operating status switch Touch this switch to switch the screen to the "Reel change operating status" screen.

Screen No. Screen title Description Reference 30000 Home Home screen Page 224

30050 Header Title bar Page 221

30100 Operation monitor Operation monitor screen Page 225

30200 Unwinder setting Unwinder setting screen Page 229

30300 Rewinder setting 1 Rewinder setting 1 screen Page 232

30400 Rewinder setting 2 Rewinder setting 2 screen Page 234

30500 Line operation setting Line operation setting screen Page 237

30600 Operation graph Graph screen Page 240

30700 Reel Change1 Reel change setting screen Page 243

30800 Reel Change2 Reel change operating status screen Page 245

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(7)

(6)

(9)

(8)

(1)

4 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Operation monitor screen The operation of the whole line can be monitored, and the dancer control signals can be turned on/off and the line operation can be started/stopped. Basic setting values of Unwinder setting/Operation setting/Rewinder setting can be monitored and input.

Display area

(1) Unwinder speed Displays the unwinder speed during operation. (2) Winding diameter Displays the winding diameter at the unwinder side during operation. (3) Dancer position Displays the dancer position during operation.

Display area

Setting area

(14)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(11) (22)

(19)

(13)

(8)

(9)

(18) (21)(15) (16)

(17)

(7)

(6)(4)

(5)

(20)(12)(10)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 225

22

(4) Line speed Displays the line speed during operation. (5) Tension Displays the tension during operation. (6) Taper ratio Displays the taper ratio during operation. (7) Winding diameter Displays the winding diameter at the rewinder side during operation. (8) Rewinder speed Displays the rewinder speed during operation. (9) Output torque Displays the output torque during operation. (10) Dancer control switch (ON/OFF) Touching the [ON] switch enables the dancer control. Touching the [OFF] switch disables the dancer control. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (11) Preparing operation switch (ON/OFF) Touching the [ON] switch enables the preparing operation. Touching the [OFF] switch disables the preparing operation. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (12) Line operation switch (START/STOP) Touching the [START] switch starts the line operation. Touching the [STOP] switch stops the line operation. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (13) Tension control switch (ON/OFF) Touching the [ON] switch enables the tension control. Touching the [OFF] switch disables the tension control. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (14) Unwinder axis (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the unwinder axis during operation.

Application example Description [Rotation arrow display] The flashing arrow indicates that the operation is being performed (during dancer control).

[Servo status display] The at the center of the unwinder indicates the status with the color change. ::wUnwdSvSt 0 (White): Servo OFF [Servo normal] 1 (Green): Servo ON [Servo normal] 2 (Red): Servo error

[Winding diameter] Displays the status of the winding diameter by changing the size of a circle. The size of a circle (diameter) changes on ten scales depending on the winding diameter value.

6 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

(15) Dancer position (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the dancer position during operation.

(16) Main axis (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the main axis during operation.

(17) Rewinder axis (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the rewinder axis during operation.

(18) Edge position axis (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the edge position axis during operation.

(19) Edge Position Monitors the current position value of the edge position axis. (20) Edge Sensor Monitors the value detected by the edge sensor.

Application example Description [Dancer position] Displays the status of the dancer position by moving up and down . The dancer position of a circle (diameter) is moved up and down on ten scales depending on the dancer position value.

Application example Description [Arrow display] The flashing arrow indicates that the operation is being performed (during velocity control).

[Servo status display] The above the line speed indicates the status with the color change. ::wLineSvSt 0 (White): Servo OFF [Servo normal] 1 (Green): Servo ON [Servo normal] 2 (Red): Servo error

Application example Description [Rotation arrow display] The flashing arrow indicates that the operation is being performed (during torque control).

[Servo status display] The at the center of the rewinder indicates the status with the color change. ::wWdSvSt 0 (White): Servo OFF [Servo normal] 1 (Green): Servo ON [Servo normal] 2 (Red): Servo error

[Winding diameter] Displays the status of the winding diameter by changing the size of a circle. The size of a circle (diameter) changes on ten scales depending on the winding diameter value.

Application example Description [Servo status display] The of the edge position axis indicates the status with the color change. ::wEgPosCtrlSvSt 0 (White): Servo OFF [Servo normal] 1 (Green): Servo ON [Servo normal] 2 (Red): Servo error

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 227

22

(21) Web Break Detect (Monitor display) Monitors the status of the web break detection during operation.

(22) Error Reset switch Resets a web break error, motion error, and servo error.

Setting area

Unwinder setting (23) Dancer position Sets the target position for the dancer control of the unwinder axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. Touching the / switch increases/decreases the current setting value in increments of 0.1 mm. (24) Initial winding diameter Sets the initial winding diameter of the unwinder axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (25) Winding diameter switch Touching this switch sets the initial winding diameter value for the winding diameter of the unwinder side.

Operation setting (26) Line speed Sets the speed of the line operation. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. Touching the / switch increases/decreases the current setting value in increments of 0.1 m/min. (27) Last rewinder diameter Displays the last rewinder diameter of the line operation. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (28) Last rewinder diameter attainment lamp Once the rewinder axis attains the last rewinder diameter, this lamp turns on (in green) and the line operation stops.

Rewinder setting (29) Tension Sets the target tension for the tension control of the rewinder axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. Touching the / switch increases/decreases the current setting value in increments of 0.1 N. (30) Initial winding diameter Sets the initial winding diameter of the rewinder axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (31) Winding diameter switch Touching this switch sets the initial winding diameter value (Rewinder setting) for the winding diameter of the rewinder side.

Application example Description ::wWebBrkSt 0 (Black): Normal 1 (Yellow): Web break alarm 2 (Red): Web break error

(25)

(23)

(24)

(26)

(27) (31)(30)

(29)

(28)

8 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Unwinder setting screen Setting values of Target dancer position Setting/Winding diameter calculation setting/PID Control setting/Gain Auto Tuning can be monitored and input. In Gain Auto Tuning, the auto tuning can be started or stopped and auto tuning results are displayed.

Target dancer position Setting

(1) Upper limit Displays the upper limit value of Target dancer position Setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(2)

(3)

(1)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 229

23

(2) Target position Displays the target position value of Target dancer position Setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (3) Lower limit Displays the lower limit value of Target dancer position Setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

Winding diameter calculation setting

(4) Material thickness Displays the material thickness of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (5) Maximum winding diameter Displays the maximum winding diameter of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (6) Minimum winding diameter Displays the minimum winding diameter of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (7) Winding diameter calculation during starting speed Displays the winding diameter calculation during starting speed of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

PID Control setting

(8) Proportional gain Kp Displays the proportional gain Kp of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(5)

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

0 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

(9) Integral time Ti Displays the integral time Ti of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (10) Differential time Td Displays the differential time Td of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (11) Output upper limit Displays the output upper limit of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (12) Output lower limit Displays the output lower limit of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

Gain Auto Tuning

(13) Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the gain auto tuning. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (14) Auto Tuning switch (START/STOP) Touching the [START] switch starts the auto tuning. Touching the [STOP] switch stops the auto tuning. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (15) Auto Tuning results Hys Displays an auto tuning result (Hys). (16) Auto Tuning results Kp Displays an auto tuning result (Kp). (17) Auto Tuning results Ti Displays an auto tuning result (Ti). (18) Auto Tuning results switch (Use/Non-use) When the [Use] switch is touched, the values of Auto Tuning results are used at the line operation. When the [Non-use] switch is touched, the values of Auto Tuning results are not used at the line operation. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red.

(14)

(18)

(13)

(15)

(16)

(17)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 231

23

Rewinder setting 1 screen Setting values of Tension setting/Winding diameter calculation setting/PID Control setting can be monitored and input.

Tension setting

(1) Target Displays the target value of Tension setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(1)

2 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Winding diameter calculation setting

(2) Maximum winding diameter Displays the maximum winding diameter of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (3) Minimum winding diameter Displays the minimum winding diameter of Winding diameter calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

PID Control setting

(4) Proportional gain Kp Displays the proportional gain Kp of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (5) Integral time Ti Displays the integral time Ti of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (6) Differential time Td Displays the differential time Td of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (7) Output upper limit Displays the output upper limit of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (8) Output lower limit Displays the output lower limit of PID Control setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(3)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 233

23

Rewinder setting 2 screen Setting values of Inertia calculation setting can be monitored and input. In Mechanical loss setting, the automatic measurement can be started or stopped. In Taper ratio setting, data in Taper ratio setting (taper ratio and winding diameter) can be saved as a pattern and loaded from existing patterns.

Inertia calculation setting

(1) Motor Displays the motor value of Inertia calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (2) Machine Displays the machine value of Inertia calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (3) Gear ratio Displays the gear ratio of Inertia calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (4) Roll width Displays the roll width of Inertia calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (5) Material specific gravity Displays the material specific gravity of Inertia calculation setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(1)

(2)

(4) (3)

(5)

4 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Mechanical loss setting

(6) Maximum rotation speed Displays the maximum rotation speed of Mechanical loss setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (7) Rated torque Displays the rated torque of Mechanical loss setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (8) Automatic measurement switch (START/STOP) Touching the [START] switch starts the automatic measurement. Touching the [STOP] switch stops the automatic measurement. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (9) Graph Y axis display (Mechanical loss torque) Displays values of the graph axis (Mechanical loss torque). (10) Graph X axis display (Rotation speed) Displays values of the graph axis (Rotation speed).

(7)

(8)

(9)

(6)

(10)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 235

23

Taper ratio setting

(11) Pattern name Displays the pattern name loaded/saved (registered) in the Pattern Select/Register window screen. (12) Pattern Select/Register switch Touching this switch displays the Pattern Select/Register window screen. For details, refer to "Page 252 Pattern Select/Register window screen". (13) Graph Y axis display (Taper ratio) Displays values of the graph axis (Taper ratio). Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (14) Graph X axis display (Winding diameter) Displays values of the graph axis (Winding diameter). Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(14)(13)

(11) (12)

6 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Line operation setting screen Settings of the line operation (Line speed, Acceleration, Acceleration smoothing jerk, Deceleration), edge position, and web break detection can be configured.

Line speed setting

(1) Line speed Displays the line speed of Line speed setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (2) Acceleration Acc Displays the acceleration of Line speed setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (3) Deceleration Dec Displays the deceleration of Line speed setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (4) Acceleration smoothing Jerk Displays the acceleration smoothing jerk of Line speed setting. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 237

23

Edge Position Control

(5) Edge Sensor Act. Val. Displays the value (Edge position from the line center position) detected by the edge sensor. (6) Edge Sensor Set Val. Sets the target value of the edge sensor in the edge position control. (7) FWD. Limit Sets the forward end position of the edge position axis. (8) REV. Limit Sets the recession end position of the edge position axis. (9) Proportional gain Kp Sets the proportional gain value of the edge position control (velocity PID control). (10) Integral time Ti Sets the integral time of the edge position control (velocity PID control). (11) Differential time Td Sets the differential time of the edge position control (velocity PID control). (12) Output upper limit Sets the upper limit value of the velocity command in the edge position control (velocity PID control). (13) Output lower limit Sets the lower limit value of the velocity command in the edge position control (velocity PID control).

(11)

(10)

(9)

(6)

(5)

(13)

(12)

(8)

(7)

8 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Web Break Detect

(14) Tension Act.Val. Displays the value detected by the tension detector. (15) Tension Cmd.Val. Displays the tension command value of the tension control (rewinding). (16) Tension Upper Limit Sets the tension upper limit value to detect a web break. (17) Tension Lower Limit Sets the tension lower limit value to detect a web break. (18) Deviation Upper Limit Sets the deviation upper limit value between the tension command value and the current value of tension to detect a web alarm. (19) Deviation Lower Limit Sets the deviation lower limit value between the tension command value and the current value of tension to detect a web alarm. (20) Alarm Hysteresis Sets the hysteresis value for the deviation upper/lower limit values at a detection of a web alarm. (21) Delay Time Sets the delay time for the deviation upper/lower limit values at a detection of a web alarm.

(19)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(14)

(21)

(20)

(15)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 239

24

Graph screen Displays the line speed, unwinder/rewinder speed, dancer position, and tension in one historical trend graph. The data collected and accumulated in an SD memory card with the logging function is displayed in the historical trend graph. The current and past information can be displayed in the graph to use the accumulated data. When no SD memory card has been inserted, sampling of graph data will stop in about 10 minutes.

< > The input ranges of the upper limit values and lower limit values do not change depending on each input value. Always input an upper limit value larger than a lower limit value so that the lower limit value does not exceed the upper limit value. The intermediate value is automatically calculated from the set upper limit value and lower limit value and displayed.

(1) Graph setting Displays the line speed, unwinder/rewinder speed, dancer position, and tension in one graph. The vertical axis of the graph is based on the line speed, and the unwinder/rewinder speed, dancer position, and tension are tuned for the axis width of the line speed (graph calculation). The points that indicate the latest values are always at the right end of the graph. Touching the graph being drawn displays the cursor in the touched area and displays the Cursor information window screen. For details of the Cursor information window screen, refer to "Page 251 Cursor information window screen".

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3) (5)

(6)

(8)

(7)

(9)

0 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

[Logging setting] The following table lists the settings.

(2) Graph axis display (Line speed) Displays values of the graph axis (Line speed). (Upper limit value, intermediate value, and lower limit value from the top) For the upper limit value and lower limit value, touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input values. (3) Graph axis display (Unwinder Rewinder speed) Displays values of the graph axis (Unwinder Rewinder speed). (Upper limit value, intermediate value, and lower limit value from the top) For the upper limit value and lower limit value, touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input values. (4) Graph axis display (Dancer position) Displays values of the graph axis (Dancer position). (Upper limit value, intermediate value, and lower limit value from the top) For the upper limit value and lower limit value, touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input values. (5) Graph axis display (Tension) Displays values of the graph axis (Tension). (Upper limit value, intermediate value, and lower limit value from the top) For the upper limit value and lower limit value, touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input values. (6) Graph display end position date/time Displays the latest display end position date and time. (7) Graph display start position date/time Displays the latest display start position date and time. (8) Switches for graph display Touch switches for a historical trend graph. The following table lists the operations to be performed when each of the switches is touched.

Set Details Logging ID 30000

Logging name CNV_Ldgging

Power failure holding The GOT holds data at a power failure.

Logging method File saving mode

Number of logs in a file 43200 logs (for 12 hours)

Logging trigger 1 second cycle (10 100 ms)

Number of buffering logs to be stored 600 logs (for 10 minutes)

Logging data The following shows data to be logged. Line speed ::eLineSpdAct Unwinder speed ::eUnwdSpdAct Rewinder speed ::eWdSpdAct Dancer position ::eDancerPosAct Tension ::eWdTensionAct

Switch Description Zooms in the time axis of the graph with reference to the axis of new data.

Zooms out the time axis of the graph with reference to the axis of new data. This operation can be performed only when the time axis has been zoomed in from the default display.

Moves the graph to the left by page.

Moves the graph to the left.

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 241

24

(9) Graph color for graph display The following figure shows line colors and line types in the graph of Line speed, Unwinder/Rewinder speed, Dancer position, and Tension.

Moves the cursor to the left by one second. Moves the cursor in the direction of old data.

Moves the cursor to the right by one second. Moves the cursor in the direction of new data.

Moves the graph to the right.

Moves the graph to the right by page.

Displays the latest data.

Switch Description

2 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Reel change setting screen Setting values of Reel change can be monitored and input.

Setting

(1) Unwinding axis select Sets the current axis for unwinding. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (2) Turn notification diameter Sets the winding diameter to output the reel change start prealarm. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

(1) (7) (8)

(6) (5) (9)(10)

(12)

(11) (2)

(3)

(4)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 243

24

(3) Diameter at reel change start Sets the winding diameter where the reel change (turret rotation) is started. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (4) Turret turning speed Sets the turret turning speed at the reel change. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (5) During reel change waiting reel acc time Sets the time taken for the speed to reach the line speed at the startup of the waiting axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (6) During reel change waiting reel dec time Sets the time taken for the speed to reach zero when the waiting axis has stopped. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (7) Turret-Waiting axis distance (for waiting reel diameter calculation) Sets the distance between the center of the turret axis and the center of the waiting axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (8) Roll edge sensor installation angle (for waiting reel diameter calculation) Sets the installation angle of the roll edge detection sensor. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (9) Contact-Cut position (for touch roll & cutter operating angle calculation) Sets the distance between the contact point of the touch roll and the cutting point of the cutter. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (10) Contact-Tape sensor angle (for touch roll & cutter operating angle calculation) Sets the angle between the contact point of the touch roll and the installation position of the tape detection sensor. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (11) Touch roll operation time correction Sets the correction value to be multiplied by the time taken from the detection of adhesion tape to the start of the touch roll operation. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (12) Cutter operation time correction Sets the correction value to be multiplied by the time taken from the detection of adhesion tape to the start of the cutter operation. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value.

4 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Reel change operating status screen The reel change operating status can be monitored and manual operation can be performed.

Unwinding reel status

(1) Running axis Displays the current axis controlling the tension. The lamp of the current axis controlling the tension turns on. (2) Winding diameter Displays the current winding diameter of A-axis. (3) Winding diameter Displays the current winding diameter of B-axis.

(1)

(2)

(3)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 245

24

Reel change operating status

(4) Turret position Displays the current turret position. (5) Waiting reel diameter Displays the calculation result of the waiting reel diameter at the reel change. (6) Touch roll angle Displays the calculated angle of the waiting axis where the touch roll starts operating at the reel change. (7) Cutting angle Displays the calculated angle of the waiting axis where the cutter starts operating at the reel change. (8) Roll edge detect lamp This lamp turns on when the waiting reel diameter calculation sensor is detected. (9) Tape detect sensor lamp This lamp turns on when the adhesion tape detection sensor is detected. (10) Paste / Cut warning lamp This lamp turns on when the tape detection sensor cannot be detected while the waiting axis rotates one revolution after the touch roll starts operating. (11) Diameter calculation err lamp This lamp turns on when a diameter calculation error has occurred at the reel change. (12) Cutter angle calculation err lamp This lamp turns on when a cutter operation angle calculation error has occurred at the reel change. (13) Tape detect err lamp This lamp turns on when no tape is detected at the reel change. (14) Reel change status display Displays the reel change status. There are three types of status: "Stand-by", "Turret turning", and "Reel change". (15) PreAlarm lamp This lamp turns on when a prealarm of the reel change is output. (16) Reel change start lamp This lamp turns on when an alarm of the reel change is output.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(14)

(15)

(16)

6 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Operation

(17) PreAlarm reset switch Touching this switch resets the prealarm of the reel change. (18) Start signal reset switch Touching this switch resets the reel change start signal. (19) Reel change warning reset switch Touching this switch resets "Paste / Cut warning" that has occurred at the reel change. (20) Reel change error reset switch Touching this switch resets errors (diameter calculation error, touch roll angle calculation error, cutter angle calculation error) that have occurred at the reel change. (21) Waiting reel ready switch (ON/OFF) Touching the [ON] switch changes the status of the waiting axis to the waiting reel ready status. Touching the [OFF] switch resets the waiting reel ready status. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red.

Reel change

(22) Operation mode switch (Auto/Manual) Selects a reel change operation mode. Touching the [Auto] switch enables the auto mode. Touching the [Manual] switch enables the manual mode. Unless the turret lock is "Lock" and the touch roll and cutter are "Up", the auto mode is not enabled. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (23) Reel change forced execution switch Touching this switch in the auto mode starts the reel change at a desired timing.

(19)

(20)

(17)

(18)

(21)

(22)

(23)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 247

24

Turret

(24) A-axis position switch When this switch is touched in the manual mode, the turret performs the forward positioning operation so that A-axis moves to the unwinding position. (25) B-axis position switch When this switch is touched in the manual mode, the turret performs the forward positioning operation so that B-axis moves to the unwinding position. (26) STOP switch When this switch is touched while the turret is performing the forward positioning operation triggered by the A-axis position/B- axis position switch, the turret axis is stopped. (27) Home position setting execution switch Touching this switch in the manual mode sets the current turret position to 0 degree.

JOG operation

(28) Speed Displays the JOG speed of each axis. Touching the numerical value display area displays a numeric keypad. Input a value. (29) Forward switch Touching this switch in the manual mode performs the forward JOG operation of each axis. (30) Reverse switch Touching this switch in the manual mode performs the reverse JOG operation of each axis. (31) Busy lamp This lamp turns on in green when each axis is in operation.

(24) (25) (26) (27)

(28) (29) (30) (31)

8 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen

6

Servo ON/OFF

(32) Servo ON/OFF switches Touching the [ON] switch in the manual mode individually sets each axis to the servo-on status. Touching the [OFF] switch in the manual mode individually sets each axis to the servo-off status. The servo on/off is also available in the auto mode only when the waiting axis has stopped. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red.

Auxiliary

(33) Turret lock switch (Unlock/Lock) Touching the [Unlock] switch unlocks the turret lock. Touching the [Lock] switch locks the turret. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (34) Touch roll switch (Down/Up) Touching the [Down] switch lowers the height of the touch roll. Touching the [Up] switch raises the height of the touch roll. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red. (35) Cutter switch (Down/Up) Touching the [Down] switch lowers the height of the cutter. Touching the [Up] switch raises the height of the cutter. When one of the switches is touched, the lamp at the bottom of the switch turns on in red.

(32)

(33)

(34)

(35)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.5 Base Screen 249

25

6.6 Window Screen The following table lists window screens.

GOT system alarm reset window screen Resets a GOT system alarm.

When a GOT system alarm has occurred, touching the system alarm message display area (bottom of the screen) displays this screen. Touching the [OK] switch resets the system alarm and closes the window screen. Touching the [Cancel] switch closes the window screen without resetting the system alarm.

Screen No. Screen title Description Reference 30000 GOT System Alarm Reset GOT system alarm reset window screen Page 250

30001 Language Setting Language Setting window screen Page 222

30002 Clock Setting Clock Setting window screen Page 223

30007 Footer 1 Main menu 1 Page 221

30008 Footer 2 Main menu 2 Page 221

30010 Key Window (Dec) Numerical input [Decimal key window] Page 220

30020 Key Window (ABC)_E Character input [Uppercase alphabets + Numerical values] Page 220

30021 Key Window (abc)_E Character input [Lowercase alphabets + Numerical values] Page 220

30022 Key Window (Symbol)_E Character input [Symbols + Numerical values] Page 220

30100 Cursor information Cursor information window screen Page 251

30200 Recipe Pattern Select/Register window screen Page 252

30201 Save confirmation Save confirmation window screen Page 254

30202 Del confirmation Deletion confirmation window screen Page 254

30203 Process result display Result display window screen Page 254

(1) (2)

0 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen

6

Cursor information window screen Displays the date and time, line speed, unwinder/rewinder speed, dancer position, and tension at the position where the cursor is placed in the graph in the Graph screen.

(1) Date and time display Displays the date and time (year, month, date, hour, minute, second) at the position where the cursor is placed. (2) Line speed Displays the line speed at the position where the cursor is placed. (3) Unwinder speed Displays the unwinder speed at the position where the cursor is placed. (4) Rewinder speed Displays the rewinder speed at the position where the cursor is placed. (5) Dancer position Displays the dancer position at the position where the cursor is placed. (6) Tension Displays the tension at the position where the cursor is placed. (7) [OK] switch Touching this switch closes the Cursor information window screen.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen 251

25

Pattern Select/Register window screen Gives a pattern name to data of Taper ratio setting (Taper ratio/Winding diameter) input in the Rewinder setting 2 screen and saves (registers) the data. A saved pattern name can also be selected to load or delete the data of Taper ratio setting (Taper ratio/Winding diameter).

The following table lists the settings of the recipe function.

(1) Pattern name list display area Lists the pattern names that have already been saved. Up to five pattern names are listed in a page, and the page to be displayed can be switched using the pattern scroll up/down switch. Up to 20 pattern names can be displayed. Touching a saved pattern name highlights the selected pattern name and displays the pattern name in Pattern name. (2) Pattern scroll up switch The pattern scroll up switch appears when the number of saved pattern names is 6 or more and five of the 6th to 20th pattern names are displayed in the pattern name list display area. Touching this switch scrolls up the display in the pattern name list display area.

Set Details Recipe No. 30000

Recipe name CNV_Recipe

Recipe file A recipe file is used. (Write or load processing is performed.)

File type CSV file

Drive name A: Standard SD memory card

Folder name Package1\CNV_Recipe

File name CNV_Recipe(_****.CSV)

Devices from/to which recipes are loaded/saved (registered)

The number of blocks is 10. The following shows the device settings. No.1::stWdTaperTbl.eTableY[0] No.2::stWdTaperTbl.eTableY[1] No.3::stWdTaperTbl.eTableY[2] No.4::stWdTaperTbl.eTableY[3] No.5::stWdTaperTbl.eTableY[4] No.6::stWdTaperTbl.eTableX[0] No.7::stWdTaperTbl.eTableX[1] No.8::stWdTaperTbl.eTableX[2] No.9::stWdTaperTbl.eTableX[3] No.10::stWdTaperTbl.eTableX[4]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5) (6) (7)

(4)

2 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen

6

(3) Pattern scroll down switch The pattern scroll down switch appears when the number of saved pattern names is 6 or more and five of the 1st to 15th pattern names are displayed in the pattern name list display area. Touching this switch scrolls down the display in the pattern name list display area. (4) Pattern name Set a name for registering data in Taper ratio setting (Taper ratio/Winding diameter) as a pattern. Alphabets, numbers, and symbols can be used for a pattern name and up to 12 characters can be input. Touching the character display area of the pattern name displays a key window for character input. Input a pattern name. Touching a pattern name displayed in the pattern name list display area also input a pattern name. (5) [Load] switch Touching this switch loads the data of the pattern name set in Pattern name to data in Taper ratio setting (Taper ratio/Winding diameter). After that, the Pattern Select/Register window screen is closed. (6) [Save] switch Touching this switch saves data in Taper ratio setting (Taper ratio/Winding diameter) with the pattern name displayed in Pattern name. (7) [Delete] switch Touching this switch deletes the data of the pattern name displayed in Pattern name.

Precautions The pattern names displayed in the pattern name list display area are not always listed in order of saving (registration). It depends on the GOT internal processing. Even when a row in the pattern name list display area is touched, the pattern name is highlighted, and a new pattern name is input and saved (registered), the pattern name is not always registered in the touched row. It depends on the GOT internal processing.

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen 253

25

Save confirmation window screen Displayed when data is to be saved with a new pattern name or with an existing pattern name.

Deletion confirmation window screen Displayed when saved data is to be deleted.

Result display window screen Displayed when the [Load]/[Save]/[Delete] switch is touched and no pattern name has been set or the data of the specified

pattern name does not exist.

Displayed when the [Load]/[Save]/[Delete] switch is touched but no SD memory card has been inserted.

Displayed when the data save processing is normally completed.

4 6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen

6

Displayed when the data deletion processing is normally completed.

Displayed when saving data is attempted and the number of registered patterns has reached the maximum number of patterns to be registered (20 patterns).

6 GOT APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES 6.6 Window Screen 255

25

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL)

This chapter describes the system configuration and program specifications of a program example for rewinding materials with the winding core in the flat type using this application.

7.1 System Configuration AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS_FlatWind (SSCNET/H)/AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77GF_FlatWind (CC-Link IE Field)

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Ethernet

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

M

Gear ratio 1/5

Gear ratio 1/5

Gear ratio

1/5 M

M

Servo motor HG-

Tension detector

0 to 100 N

0 to 10 V

Upper limit: 10 V (+500 mm)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -10 V (-500 mm)

Roller circumference = 500 mm Roller diameter = 159.1549 mm

Winding core circumference = 600 mm

Winding core thickness = 10 mm

Axis 1

Speed control

-30 mm to +30 mm (-10 V to 10 V)

Axis 4

Simple Motion module RD77MS /RD77GF

Servo amplifier MR-J4- B/MR-J4- GF

Servo motor HG-

Edge sensor

Ball screw pitch = 5 mm (Nip roll: Lateral movement)

Servo motor HG-

Servo motor HG-

Edge sensor

Speed control

Speed control

Position control

SSCNET/H, CC-Link IE Field

Axis 2 Axis 3

Rewinder axisUnwinder axis

Feeding axis

Edge position axis

Edge position axis

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

Dancer roll position

detection

6 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.1 System Configuration

7

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-78G_FlatWind(CC-Link IE TSN)

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

GOT2000 GT27**-V

Ethernet

Roller circumference = 600 mm Roller diameter = 190.9859 mm

M

Gear ratio 1/5

Gear ratio 1/5

Gear ratio

1/5 M

M

Servo motor HK-

Tension detector

0 to 100 N

0 to 10 V

Upper limit: 10 V (+500 mm)

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -10 V (-500 mm)

Roller circumference = 500 mm Roller diameter = 159.1549 mm

Winding core circumference = 600 mm

Winding core thickness = 10 mm

Axis 1

Speed control

-30 mm to +30 mm (-10 V to 10 V)

Axis 4

Motion module RD78G

Servo amplifier MR-J5-G/MR-J5W-G

Servo motor HK-

Edge sensor

Ball screw pitch = 5 mm (Nip roll: Lateral movement)

Servo motor HK-

Servo motor HK-

Edge sensor

Speed control

Speed control

Position control

CC-Link IE TSN

Axis 2 Axis 3

Rewinder axisUnwinder axis

Feeding axis

Edge position axis

Edge position axis

SD memory card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

Dancer roll position

detection

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.1 System Configuration 257

25

7.2 Control Overview The positioning of the virtual axis is started using the movement amount of the winding core circumference number of windings. Input the command velocity of the virtual axis as a standard velocity (line velocity) to the FBs for velocity control of the unwinder axis and feeding axis to perform the dancer feedback velocity control and tension sensor feedback velocity control for the material feeding with the constant tension. The rewinder axis performs the synchronous control using the cam pattern for the flat roll by inputting the virtual axis position so that the material rewinder speed is constant (Line velocity). The edge sensor detects material edges between the feeding axis and rewinder axis and edge position axis corrects a horizontal deviation (Edge position control).

Edge position axis Feeding axis

Dancer position

Tension detector

Edge sensor

Velocity command

Velocity command

Velocity command

Unwinder axis Rewinder axis

Edge position control FB

Tension sensor feedback velocity

control FB (for intermediate axis)

Dancer feedback velocity control FB

Feed speed

Line velocity

CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl

Virtual axis

Positioning data (Virtual axis)

Unit conversion [mm/min] [m/min]

CNV_EdgePositionCtrl

Unit conversion of the rewinder core circumference [mm] number of turns [ 0.1 m]

CNV_FlatWindingCam***

Cam generation for flat roll FB

Cam pattern for the flat roll (coordinate data expression)

Winding core circumference

360 degree (Rewinder

axis)

Synchronous control

Virtual axis

Position command

8 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.2 Control Overview

7

7.3 Operation Specifications Line velocity: 10 m/min Line acceleration/deceleration time: 1000 ms Number of rewinding times: 50 times Material thickness: 0.05 mm Material width: 100 mm Minimum unwinding diameter: 200 mm Maximum unwinding diameter: 1000 mm Set tension: 10 N

7.4 Control Specifications Item Unwinder axis Feeding axis Rewinder axis Edge position axis Axis number 1 2 3 4

Control mode Speed control Speed control Position control (Cam control)

Speed control

Detector Dancer roll Tension detector Edge sensor

Tension gain auto tuning

Winding diameter calculation Web thickness integration method

Direction Upper unwinding Upper rewinding

Control cycle 0.888 ms (RD77MS)/1.0 ms (RD77GF)/1.0 ms (RD78G(S))

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.3 Operation Specifications 259

26

7.5 Program Configuration

Language The following languages are used in this program. Program comment: English Label comment: Japanese, English, Chinese (Simplified)

List of programs

FB CNV_TensionControl_R (Refer to "Page 47 FB LIBRARY".)

ExamplePrgCtrl (Refer to "Page 269 ExamplePrgCtrl FB".)

Program name Description Execution type Describing method Initial Initial parameter setting Initial ST

PreOperation Preparing operation, line operation control, and cam generation Preparing operation (Servo ON/OFF) Line operation control JOG operation, home position return Cam generation for flat roll

Scan FBD

HMI_IF Touch panel I/O processing Scan ST

TensionControl Tension control main processing Tension control (unwinder axis/feeding axis) Edge position control

Event (I44) (RD77MS, RD77GF) Fixed cycle (1 ms) (RD78G(S))

FBD

Item FB name Description Program Activation CNV_Activation License activation PreOperation

Tension control CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl Dancer feedback velocity control TensionControl

CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl Tension sensor feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)

TensionControl

Roll diameter calculation CNV_DiaCalcThickness Roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method)

TensionControl

Tuning function CNV_PIDControl PID control (with Tension PI Gain auto tuning) TensionControl

Additional function CNV_EdgePositionCtrl Edge position control TensionControl

Flat roll CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method) PreOperation

CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method) PreOperation

Filters STD_Limiter Limiter TensionControl

FB name Description Describing method

Program

MotionReady Simple Motion module start processing ST PreOperation

ServoON Servo ON processing ST PreOperation

MotionErrorReset Error reset processing ST PreOperation

JOG JOG operation processing ST PreOperation

DancerPos Dancer position A/D value conversion processing ST TensionControl

TensionAD Tension detector A/D value conversion processing ST TensionControl

EdgePos A/D value conversion processing at the edge sensor detection position ST TensionControl

PositioningDataSet Positioning data for line operation setting processing ST PreOperation

LineSpeedCalc Line speed conversion processing for tension control ST TensionControl

ReadCamData Cam data read for monitor ST PreOperation

0 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.5 Program Configuration

7

7.6 Program Processing

Initial (Initial parameter setting) Set event task starts, each variable's initial value, and constants. Setting of execution cycle Setting of unwinder axis Setting of feed axis Setting of rewinder axis Setting of edge position axis Setting of virtual axis Setting of line operation

PreOperation (Preparing operation, Start line operation, and Cam generation) Servo ON/OFF control

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing 261

26

Line operation start processing The tension control or line operation is started with the switch on the GOT screen.

By turning on the "Tension control" switch in the all axes servo-on status, the bits for starting FBs of the dancer control, tension control, and edge position control are turned on, and the synchronous control of the rewinder axis is started.

The FBs of the dancer control, tension control, and edge position control are normally started, and the positioning of the virtual axis is started by turning on the "Line operation" start switch at the synchronous control mode of the rewinder.

Positioning data of the virtual axis of the movement amount of the winding core circumference number of windings is set.

The "Line operation" stop switch is turned on during operation, the positioning is interrupted with the stop command of the virtual axis.

2 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing

7

Home position return processing

JOG operation processing of each axis

Rewinder home position return

Edge position axis home position return

The normal home position return is performed when the "Home position return" switch is on, and the positioning to "0" degree is performed when the "Tension control" switch is on at the line operation.

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing 263

26

Error reset processing of each axis

Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method) of the rewinder axis

Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method) of the rewinder axis

Flat cam generation (measurement) FB

Flat cam generation (calculation) FB

4 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing

7

Cam data reading for displaying data Cam data is read to display the cam pattern on the GOT screen.

The XY coordinate table is created.

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing 265

26

HMI_IF (Touch panel I/O processing) The processing for displaying the GOT screen is performed.

Servo state of unwinder (wUnwdSvSt) Alarm: 2,

Servo OFF (no alarm): 0

Servo state of feeding axis (wFeedSvSt)

Servo state of rewinder (wWdSvSt)

Rewinder axis in flat roll operation

U0\G2577: Md.108 Servo status 1

U0\G2677: Md.108 Servo status 1

Servo ON: 1,

U0\G2477: Md.108 Servo status 1

Alarm: 2,

Servo OFF (no alarm): 0 Servo ON: 1,

Alarm: 2,

Servo OFF (no alarm): 0 Servo ON: 1,

Edge position axis status (wEgPosCtrlSvSt) U0\G2777: Md.108 Servo status 1

Alarm: 2,

Servo OFF (no alarm): 0 Servo ON: 1,

Edge position axis in speed mode Actual current value of edge position axis

Completion of edge position axis home position return

Rewinding completionCompletion of rewinder home position return

Rewinder axis current value

Feeding axis current value

Feeding axis in speed mode

Unwinder axis current value

Unwinder in speed control mode

6 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing

7

TensionControl (Tension control (unwinder/feeding axis), Edge position control) Dancer control of the unwinder axis When Start tension control (bUnwdDancerCtrl) turns on, the dancer feedback velocity control FB (CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl) is started. The dancer detection analog value is converted into a position and input in the feedback value of the velocity control FB. The velocity is controlled to make the dancer position reach the target position. Every time the unwinder axis rotates, the roll diameter calculation (Web thickness integration method) FB decrements the material thickness value 2 and calculates the current winding diameter. The current winding diameter is input in the velocity control FB, and the velocity is controlled to make the circumferential velocity reach the line velocity.

The dancer analog value is converted into the position [mm].

Roll diameter calculation FB

Dancer speed control FB

The virtual axis speed is input to the line velocity.

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing 267

26

Tension control of the feeding axis When Start tension control (bUnwdDancerCtrl) turns on, the tension sensor feedback velocity control FB (CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl) is started. The tension detection analog value is converted into a tension [N] and input in the feedback value of the velocity control FB. The velocity is controlled to make the tension reach the target position.

Edge position axis control The edge position control FB (CNV_EdgePositionCtrl) is started with the Tension control ON switch on the GOT screen. The edge sensor analog value is converted into an edge position, and the velocity is controlled so that the edge position reaches the target position.

The analog value of the tension sensor is converted into the tension [N]. Tension sensor

speed control FB

The virtual axis speed is input to the line velocity.

The analog value of the edge sensor is converted into the position [mm].

Edge position control FB

8 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.6 Program Processing

7

7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB

MotionReady This FB starts the Simple Motion module for the start I/O number setting. To perform the amplifier-less operation, turn on i_bAmplessMode to start the module. However, this FB does not support the amplifier-less operation of the RD78G(S).

ServoON This FB performs the servo ON processing for the corresponding axis in the axis setting.

MotionErrorReset This FB performs the motion error reset processing for the corresponding axis in the axis setting.

JOG This FB performs the JOG operation for the setting axis.

Execution command (Bit)

Amplifier-less operation (Bit)

Start I/O number (Word [Unsigned])

Executing (Bit)

Execution command (Bit)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF) Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

Servo ON status (Bit)

Reset (Bit)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

JOG forward (Bit)

JOG reverse (Bit)

JOG speed (Signed double word)

Axis setting (AXIS_REF)

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB 269

27

DancerPos This FB converts an A/D output value into a dancer position (single precision real number).

TensionAD This FB converts an A/D output value into a tension value (single precision real number).

EdgePos This FB converts an A/D output value into an edge position (single precision real number).

PositioningDataSet This FB sets the positioning data for the line operation.

LineSpeedCalc This FB converts the monitor speed [0.01 mm/min] of the virtual axis into the line speed [m/min] for the tension control.

Dancer position conversion value

(Single precision real number)(Word [Signed]) A/D module output value

A/D module output value

(Word [Signed])

Tension conversion value

(Single precision real number)

Edge position conversion value (Single precision real number)

A/D module output value (Word [Signed])

Executing (Bit)Execution command (Bit)

Line conversion value (Single precision real number)

Input speed (Word [Signed])

0 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB

7

ReadCamData (Cam data read)

Name ReadCamData

Function overview Item Description Function overview This FB reads the cam data so that the cam outline of the cam No. specified by the Simple Motion module is recognized.

Symbol

Applicable hardware and software

Applicable module RD77MS, RD77GF, RD78G(S)

Applicable CPU MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module

Engineering software GX Works3

Number of steps 1583 steps (For the macro type)

FB dependence None

Function description This FB reads the cam data to be displayed on the application screen example (cam monitor screen) of the GOT from the Simple Motion module. When i_bEN (Execution command) is turned on, cam data reading of the specified i_uCamNo (Cam No.) is started. The FB reads the cam data from the cam open area using "[Cd.600] Cam data operation request" of the Simple Motion module,

and then reads "[Cd.605] Cam resolution" and "[Cd.607] Cam data value" condensed into 128 points from that data.

When the cam data reading has been completed and the output label has been updated, o_bOK (Normal completion) turns on. If an error occurs in the FB, Error is turned on and the error code is stored in ErrorID. For details of error codes, refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".

Compiling method Macro type, subroutine type

FB operation type Pulsed execution (multiple scan execution type)

Restrictions and precautions

This FB uses index registers Z17 to Z19. Do not use this index register in an interrupt program.

Execution command B: i_bEN

o_dMinInVal :D Minimum input value

o_dMaxInVal :D Maximum input value

o_stCamData :DUT Cam data

o_dMinOutVal :D Minimum output value

o_dMaxOutVal :D Maximum output value

o_bENO :B Executing

Start I/O number UW: i_uStartIO o_bOK :B Normal completion

Cam No. UW: i_uCamNo o_bError :B Error completion

o_uErrorID :UW Error code

o_uCamResolution :UW Cam resolution

ReadCamData

Stroke

100 [%]

360 [degree]

0 1 cycle

100 [%]

360 [degree]

0 1 cycle

Maximum output value (o)

Minimum input value (o)

Minimum output value (o)

Stroke[Cd.605] Cam resolution 128 points

[Cd.600] Cam data operation request

[Cd.607] Cam data (Cam open area) Cam outline data

Maximum input value (o)

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB 271

27

Labels Input labels

*1 : Always, : Only when the FB is started

Output labels

Cam data (CamData structure)

*1 : The value is held after the FB stops. : The value is cleared after the FB stops.

Name Label name Data type Read timing* 1

Setting range Initial value

Description

Execution command

i_bEN Bit ON, OFF On: The FB is activated. Off: The FB is not activated.

Start I/O number

i_uStartIO Word [Unsigned]

0H start I/O number FEH 0 Installation address of the Simple Motion module (Upper three digits of four digits (hexadecimal))

Cam No. i_uCamNo Word [Unsigned]

1 to 256 (RD77MS) 1 to 1024 (RD77GF) 1 to 256 (RD78G(S))

1 Set the Cam No. to read the data.

Name Label name Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Executing o_bENO Bit On: While Execution command is on Off: Execution command is off.

Normal completion o_bOK Bit On: Indicates that the cam data reading has been completed and the output data has been normally updated. Off: Indicates that the FB operation has not completed.

Error completion o_bError Bit On: An error has occurred in the FB. Off: No error has occurred.

Error code o_uErrorID Word [Unsigned] The error code of the error that has occurred in the FB is stored. (Refer to "Page 289 List of Error Codes".)

Cam resolution o_uCamResolution Word [Unsigned] The cam resolution of the read cam is stored.

Minimum input value

o_dMinInVal Double word [Signed] The minimum value of the cam data input value (cam axis 1 cycle length) is stored.

Maximum input value

o_dMaxInVal Double word [Signed] The maximum value of the cam data input value (cam axis 1 cycle length) is stored.

Minimum output value

o_dMinOutVal Double word [Signed] The minimum value of the cam data output value (cam stroke amount) is stored.

Maximum output value

o_dMaxOutVal Double word [Signed] The maximum value of the cam data output value (cam stroke amount) is stored.

Cam data o_stCamData CamData Refer to the following cam data.

Name Label name Array No. Data type Value to be held*1

Description

Input value (Cycle point)

d128InVal_Cycle [0] Double word [Signed] (0..127)

The first point of the input value (cam axis 1 cycle length) is stored.

[1] The second point of the input value (cam axis 1 cycle length) is stored.

[127] The 128th point of the input value (cam axis 1 cycle length) is stored.

Output value (Stroke amount)

d128OutVal_Stroke [0] Double word [Signed] (0..127)

The first point of the output value (cam stroke amount) is stored.

[1] The second point of the output value (cam stroke amount) is stored.

[127] The 128th point of the output value (cam stroke amount) is stored.

2 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.7 ExamplePrgCtrl FB

7

7.8 Operation Procedure Start the operation with the following procedure. (For the function details of each screen, refer to "Page 275 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL)".)

1. Write project data to the PLC CPU and GOT and start the system. Touch the [Operation monitor] switch.

2. Touch the [ON] switch of Preparing operation. Turning on of Preparing operation sets all axes in the servo-on status.

3. At the first startup, switch the screen to the "Operation setting" screen and perform "Home pos. return" of the rewinder axis and edge position axis.

7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.8 Operation Procedure 273

27

4. Touch the [Winding Diameter] switch. The initial winding diameter is set as the winding diameter (current value).

5. Touching the [ON] switch of Tension control starts the dancer control of the unwinder axis, tension control of the feeding axis, and edge position control of the edge position axis. The rewinder axis performs positioning to the starting position (0 degree).

6. Touching the [START] switch of Line operation starts operation at the set feed speed.

Unless the rewinder axis is in the starting position (0 degree), the line operation does not start.

7. After the rotation of the rewinder axis for "Number of turns" has been completed, the [Winding complete] lamp turns on and the line operation stops.

After the rotation of the rewinder axis for "Number of turns" has been completed, the [Winding complete] lamp turns on.

4 7 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) 7.8 Operation Procedure

8

8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL)

This chapter describes the specifications of the screen examples for rewinding with a flat type roll using this application.

8.1 Home Screen After the GOT is started, this screen appears first. Touch a switch to switch the screen to each screen.

8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 8.1 Home Screen 275

27

8.2 Operation Monitor Screen The operation of the whole line can be monitored, the operation setting can be performed, and each operation can be started/ stopped.

(1) Equipment monitor Displays the axis status of each equipment.

(2) Current value monitor Displays the current value of each equipment. (Numerical value: Black) (3) Operation switch

(4) Error Reset switch Resets the servo errors, motion errors, and FB errors. (5) Settings Sets the parameters for operations.

Roller color Status White Servo OFF

Green Servo ON

Red Servo error

Switch name Operation Preparing operation ON Sets all axes in the servo-on status.

OFF Sets all axes in the servo-off status.

Tension control ON Starts the dancer control of the unwinder axis, tension control of the feed axis, and edge position control.

OFF Stops the dancer control of the unwinder axis, tension control of the feed axis, and edge position control.

Line operation START Starts the rewinding operation by feeding materials with the movement amount of winding core circumference number of windings.

STOP Stops the above operation.

(5)

(4)(3)

(2) (1)

6 8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 8.2 Operation Monitor Screen

8

8.3 Unwinder Setting Screen Settings for unwinding and material feeding can be set.

8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 8.3 Unwinder Setting Screen 277

27

8.4 Rewinder Setting Screen A cam pattern for rewinding control can be generated.

Cam pattern generation After inputting the parameters, touch the [Cam generation] switch.

The switch flashes while a cam is being generated.

The switch turns on when a cam has been generated normally.

The switch turns off and the Error lamp turns on when a cam has been generated with an error.

Touching this switch when it is on generates a cam again.

8 8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 8.4 Rewinder Setting Screen

8

8.5 Operation Setting Screen Settings for line operation, JOG operation of each axis, and home position return can be set.

8 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL) 8.5 Operation Setting Screen 279

28

9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR This function is for simulating and checking the operation of the tension control on a personal computer. The converting simulation uses the converting simulator setting, GX Simulator3, GT Simulator3, and SMM Simulator in addition to the converting simulator.

9.1 Configuration and Execution Procedure of Simulator

System example

AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3 (**** indicates the alphanumeric version.) The following shows a system example for using the actual devices and equipment together.

Simple Motion module RD77MS16

Power supply module R61P

Analog input module R60AD4

PLC CPU R16CPU

Ethernet

Axis 1 GOT2000 GT27**-V Axis 3

MR-J4-500B Servo amplifier

Axis 2

CONVERTING equipment

M

Gear ratio 1/10

Upper limit: +10 V

(+500 mm) Gear ratio

1/5

Gear ratio 1/10

M

M

Tension detection

Standard: 0 V

Lower limit: -10 V

(-500 mm)

Rewinder axisUnwinder axis

Dancer roll position detection

Main axis

0 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.1 Configuration and Execution Procedure of Simulator

9

Converting simulation (image) The operation of converting system can be checked without actual devices.

Starting and closing the simulator

How to start the simulator (starting order of the program) Follow the steps below to start the converting simulator on the personal computer on which the converting simulator setting is installed.

1. Start "AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3" which is included in the DVD with GX Works3 and start the system simulation. (**** indicates the alphanumeric version.)

2. Write a project, parameters, and the Simple Motion module setting.

3. Start the Simple Motion module setting.

4. Start the converting simulator setting at the bottom of the navigation window of the Simple Motion module setting.

5. Input the parameter in the converting simulator setting. After writing the parameters from the menu "File" - "Converting Simulator" - "Write Parameter Data", click the [RESET] button of the PLC CPU on the GX Simulator3 screen. After that, select "RUN". (After changing parameters, click the [RESET] button of the PLC CPU on the GX Simulator3 screen.)

6. Start "AP20-CNV002AA-GT27nnV_****.GTX" which is included in the DVD with GT Works3. Start GT Simulator3 to run the converting system on the simulator. (**** indicates the alphanumeric version.)

For how to run the converting system, refer to the following. Page 161 Operation procedure

GT Simulator3 GX Simulator3

Link

Link

Link

Converting simulator setting

SMM Simulator

9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.1 Configuration and Execution Procedure of Simulator 281

28

Precautions Write the parameter before using the converting simulator for the first time after the installation. The converting simulator setting is always started with the default parameters. The latest written parameters are stored in

the simulator. Read the parameters from the simulator as necessary, or open the parameters saved in a file when starting the simulator.

Set the initial diameter of the converting simulator setting to the same value as that of GT Simulator (GOT screen). A mismatch of initial diameters may result in unexpected operations.

How to close the converting simulator Even when the converting simulator setting is closed, the converting simulator continues the operation. Close the system simulation to close the converting simulator.

Precautions When the converting simulator is used, subsequent system simulation operates using the parameters of the converting simulator. When simulating the normal operation of Simple Motion, delete the parameter data of the converting simulator. To delete the parameter data, select the "File" - "Converting Simulator" - "Delete Parameter Data" from the menu of the converting simulator.

Restrictions and precautions

This simulator supports "AP20-CNV002AA-R16-77MS16_****.gx3" included in the package only. (**** indicates the alphanumeric version.)

Edge position simulation cannot be performed.

Safety and handling precautions The simulation function is used to simulate the actual devices and debug the created programs. Note that the operation of

the debugged program is not guaranteed. After the debug process in the simulation function, perform the normal debug process with the actual devices connected

before the actual operation. The parameter files used for the simulation are not included in the project of MELSOFT GX Works3. Manage the parameter

files in conjunction with the project as necessary.

2 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.1 Configuration and Execution Procedure of Simulator

9

9.2 Simulator Specifications By adjusting the material and thickness of the film, simulation can be performed using the material similar to the one to be actually used. (The system is described in "Page 144 Equipment configuration".)

System specifications The following shows the specifications of the equipment operated by the simulator.

Parameter details The following shows the parameters for the converting simulator to be set for each axis. Motor model: Motor model used in the module Axis No.: Axis No. of the module Roller diameter (outer diameter): Diameter of the roller Roller diameter (inner diameter): Inner diameter of the roller Roller density: Density of the roller material Roller width: Width of the roller

M

Gear ratio 1/10

Gear ratio 1/5

Gear ratio 1/10

M

M

Tension detector

Rewinder axis

Main axis

Unwinder axis

760 120 120 440 310 455 120 120 700

Roller 1)

Tension 1) Tension 2) Tension 3) Tension 4) Tension 5)

Tension 6)

Roller 2)

Roller 3)

Roller 4)

Roller 5) Roller 6)

Roller 7)

Roller 8)

Roller 9) Roller 10)

Roller 11)

Roller 12)

500

0

-500

Dancer roll

Unit: [mm]

Roller width

Roller diameter (inner diameter)

Roller diameter (outer diameter)

9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications 283

28

Initial diameter: Diameter including the workpiece at start of operation

Roller coordinate: Central coordinate of the roller when the central coordinate of the unwinder axis is (0, 0). Reduction ratio: Reduction ratio from the motor to the corresponding roller Roller mass: Mass of the dancer roll Guide stroke: Stroke amount of the dancer roll Initial slider position: Initial position of the dancer roll

Roller 1) Usage: Unwinder axis

Roller 2) Usage: Free roll for dancer roll 1

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Motor model HG-SR502

Axis No. 1 to 32 1

Rewinder/unwinder selection w: Rewind uw: Unwind

uw: Unwind

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 191

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 161

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Initial diameter mm 191.0 to 9999.9 1000.0

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (0, 0)

Reduction ratio 0.001 to 999.999 10.000

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 3

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 80

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 60

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (760, 460)

[Unwinder axis example] [Rewinder axis example]

Initial diameter

Roller diameter

Film

Roller diameter/ initial diameter

4 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications

9

Roller 3) Usage: Dancer Roll

Roller 4) Usage: Free roll for dancer roll 2

Roller 5) Usage: Nip roll

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 4

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 160

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 150

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 2700.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (880, 0)

Roller mass kg 0.001 to 999.999 7.889

Dancer movement direction v: Vertical h: Horizontal

v: Vertical

Dancer load selection f: Constant load s: Sapring load

f: Constant load

Constant load N 1 to 999 30

Slider mass kg 0.001 to 999.999 2.000

Guide viscosity coefficient N/(m/s) 0.01 to 999.99 100.00

Guide friction coefficient 0.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000

Guide stroke mm 1 to 9999 1000

Guide position mm -9999 to 9999 0

Initial slider position mm -9999 to 9999 0

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 80

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 60

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (1000, 460)

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 -1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 160

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 150

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (1440, 580)

9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications 285

28

Roller 6) Usage: Main axis

Roller 7) Usage: Nip roll for feed roll

Roller 8) Usage: Feed roll

Roller 9) Usage: Roll for tension detector 1

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Motor model HG-SR502

Axis No. 1 to 32 2

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 159

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 139

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (1440, 420)

Reduction ratio 0.001 to 999.999 5.000

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 -1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 100

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 90

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (1750, 550)

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 3

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 100

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 90

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (1750, 450)

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 4

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 80

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 60

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (2205, 540)

6 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications

9

Roller 10) Usage: Roll on tension detector

Roller 11) Usage: Roll for tension detector 2

Roller 12) Usage: Rewinder axis

Film

*1 The initial value refers to the PET film value.

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 3

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 80

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 60

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (2325, 580)

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 4

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 80

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 60

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (2445, 540)

Name Unit Input range Initial value Availability of parameter change

Motor model HG-SR502

Axis No. 1 to 32 3

Rewinder/unwinder selection w: Rewind uw: Unwind

w: Rewind

Web connection form -1, 1 to 4 -1

Roller diameter (outer diameter) mm 1 to 9999 191

Roller diameter (inner diameter) mm 1 to 9999 161

Roller density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 7874.0

Roller width mm 1 to 9999 1200

Initial diameter mm 191.0 to 9999.9 200.0

Roller coordinate mm (0 to 99999, -99999 to 99999) (3145, 0)

Reduction ratio 0.001 to 999.999 10.000

Name Unit Input range Initial value*1 Availability of parameter change

Web young's modulus GPa 0.001 to 999.999 4.000

Web thickness m 0.1 to 99999.9 50.0

Web width mm 1 to 99999 1000

Web density kg/m3 0.1 to 9999.9 1350.0

9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications 287

28

Monitors The roll diameters and tension values are displayed on the simulator, and also stored in the following buffer memory addresses of the Simple Motion module.

Name Unit Buffer memory address Data type Remarks Roll diameter (unwinder) 10-1 mm Un\G32768 Word [Signed]

Roll diameter (rewinder) 10-1 mm Un\G32769 Word [Signed]

Tension 1) 10-1 N Un\G32770 Word [Signed] Between unwinder axis and dancer front side

Tension 2) 10-1 N Un\G32771 Word [Signed] Between dancer rear side and main axis

Tension 3) 10-1 N Un\G32772 Word [Signed] Between main axis and feed roll

Tension 4) 10-1 N Un\G32773 Word [Signed] Between feed roll and tension detector front side

Tension 5) 10-1 N Un\G32774 Word [Signed] Tension detector

Tension 6) 10-1 N Un\G32775 Word [Signed] Between tension detector rear side and rewinder axis

Dancer roll position 10-2 mm Un\G32776 Un\G32777

Double word [Signed]

Tension detector 10-1 N Un\G32778 Word [Signed]

8 9 CONVERTING SIMULATOR 9.2 Simulator Specifications

A

APPENDICES Appendix 1 List of Error Codes FB library: Warning (outside the input value range) When an error occurs at the startup of an FB, the FB does not operate. When an error occurs while an FB is operating, the FB continuously operates with the value before the occurrence of the error.

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec 100H 256 A value outside the range is set for the axis

number (station number). Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

101H 257 The tension setting value is outside the range.

102H 258 The coefficient of tension taper is a negative value.

103H 259 The current value of roll diameter is outside the range. (The value is 0.0 or less or outside the range of the minimum diameter (inside diameter) to the maximum diameter.)

104H 260 The torque of friction compensation is a negative value.

105H 261 The coefficient of velocity limit is a negative value.

106H 262 The offset of velocity limit is a negative value.

107H 263 The execution cycle is 0.0 or less.

108H 264 The winding method is set to a value other than 0 to 3.

109H 265 The gear ratio is 0.0 or less.

10AH 266 The rated torque is 0.0 or less.

10BH 267 The proportionality gain is a negative value.

10CH 268 The integral time is a negative value.

10DH 269 The differential time is a negative value.

10EH 270 Upper limit <= Lower limit

10FH 271 The set deadband is a negative value.

110H 272 The response is set to a value other than 1 to 7 when the auto tuning is started.

111H 273 The amplitude is 0.0 or less when the auto tuning is started.

114H 276 The draw ratio is a negative value.

115H 277 The acceleration is 0.0 or less.

116H 278 The deceleration is 0.0 or less.

117H 279 The forced deceleration is 0.0 or less.

118H 280 The jerk is 0.0 or less.

119H 281 The direction of rotation is set to a value other than 0 and 1.

11AH 282 The initial roll diameter is outside the range. (The value is 0.0 or less or outside the range of the minimum diameter to the maximum diameter.) The minimum roll diameter or the maximum roll diameter is outside the range. (The minimum diameter is a negative value, or the minimum roll diameter is equal to or larger than the maximum roll diameter.)

11BH 283 The minimum line velocity is a negative value.

APPX Appendix 1 List of Error Codes 289

29

11CH 284 The minimum winder velocity is a negative value.

Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

11DH 285 The web thickness is 0.0 or less.

11EH 286 The roll width is 0.0 or less.

11FH 287 The roll density is 0.0 or less.

120H 288 The machine inertia is a negative value.

121H 289 The motor inertia is a negative value.

122H 290 The coefficient of accelerating compensation is a negative value.

123H 291 The coefficient of decelerating compensation is a negative value.

124H 292 The ratio of load inertia moment is 0.0 or less.

125H 293 The number of measurement points is a value other than 2 to 50.

126H 294 The measurement time is 0.0 or less.

127H 295 The maximum velocity is outside the range.

128H 296 The estimate value of inertia is 0.0 or less.

129H 297 GD2 in maximum inertia is 0.0 or less.

12AH 298 VG2 in maximum inertia is 0.0 or less.

12BH 299 The velocity gain factor is a value other than 0.0 to 1.0.

12CH 300 The taper mode is set to a value other than 0 to 4.

12DH 301 The taper minimum value is a negative value.

12EH 302 Taper maximum value < Taper minimum value

12FH 303 The taper ratio is a value other than 0.0 to 1.0.

130H 304 The start diameter of roll is a negative value.

131H 305 Maximum roll diameter <= Start diameter of roll

133H 307 Time constant of lowpass filter < Execution cycle

134H 308 The averaging number of the moving average filter (Filter time constant/Execution cycle) has exceeded 2000. Filter time constant < Execution cycle

135H 309 Limiter: Setting value of upper limit <= Setting value of lower limit

136H 310 The table interpolation and number of measuring points are outside the range.

137H 311 Table interpolation: The X-coordinate values are not set in ascending order.

138H 312 The acceleration time is a negative value.

139H 313 The deceleration time is a negative value.

140H 320 The travel distance per rotation of the winder axis is 0 or less. (Only when the axis number is 0)

141H 321 The friction torque of coulomb is a negative value.

142H 322 The coefficient of viscous friction is a negative value.

143H 323 The minimum load inertia ratio is 0.0 or less.

144H 324 Maximum load inertia ratio <= Minimum load inertia ratio

145H 325 The measured actual torque is a negative value.

150H 336 A value outside the range is set for the cam No.

151H 337 A value outside the range is set for the cam resolution.

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec

0 APPX Appendix 1 List of Error Codes

A

3100H 12544 Tension upper limit <= Tension lower limit Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

3101H 12545 The alarm delay time is a negative value.

3102H 12546 The deviation upper limit or deviation lower limit is a negative value.

3103H 12547 Edge position Forward end setting <= Recession end setting

3104H 12548 The web alarm delay hysteresis is a negative value.

3105H 12549 Deviation upper limit <= Deviation lower limit

3106H 12550 The variation limit is a negative value.

3107H 12551 A value outside the range is set for the rewinder axis rotation speed.

3108H 12552 A value outside the range is set for the back tension torque.

3109H 12553 A value outside the range is set for the winding core circumference L.

310AH 12554 A value outside the range is set for the winding core thickness t.

310BH 12555 A value outside the range is set for the winding core distance D.

310CH 12556 In the line velocity setting, the direction has been changed to forward or backward.

Before changing the line velocity setting to forward or backward, set the line velocity setting to 0.

310DH 12557 The auto tuning was not performed normally. Check if the setting value of auto tuning amplitude and the dancer position or tension detection value are input normally. After that, execute the auto tuning again.

310EH 12558 Number of friction torque table points is other than 2 to 50

Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

310FH 12559 The winder velocity (X-coordinate value) of friction torque table is not set in ascending order.

3110H 12560 A value outside the range has been set for the velocity integral compensation.

3111H 12561 A value outside the range has been set for the correction gain.

3112H 12562 Correction upper limit value <= Correction lower limit value

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec

APPX Appendix 1 List of Error Codes 291

29

FB library: Error When an error has occurred, an FB stops its operation.

Application program control FB: Warning (outside the input value range) When an error has occurred at the startup of the FB, the FB does not operate. When an error occurs while the FB is operating, the FB continuously operates with the value before the occurrence of the error.

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec 200H 512 The FB is started while the target axis is

operating. Stop the target axis and execute the FB again.

201H 513 The target axis is not in the servo-on status. Set the servo-on status for the target axis and execute the FB again.

202H 514 A motion error has occurred in the target axis. Check the "[Md.23] Axis error No." of the target axis to check the error details and eliminate the cause of the error. After that, execute the FB again.

203H 515 The speed mode is turned off during operation. Check if the mode switching from the speed mode to another mode has been performed or if the speed mode has not been turned off due to an axis error. Eliminate the cause of the error and execute the FB again.

204H 516 The torque mode is turned off during operation. Check if the mode switching from the torque mode to another mode has been performed or if the torque mode has not been turned off due to an axis error. Eliminate the cause of the error and execute the FB again.

250H 592 A cam data operation warning has occurred during cam generation.

Check the "[Md.24] Axis warning No." of the axis 1 to check the warning details and eliminate the cause of the error. After that, execute the FB again.

251H 593 The FB is started while a cam is being generated in another FB or user program.

Before starting the FB, check that "0" is set to "[Cd.600] Cam data operation request".

252H 594 The rewinder axis velocity is high for the cam resolution.

Set the rewinder velocity so that the time taken for one rotation is longer than the product of the FB execution cycle and cam resolution. After that, execute the FB again.

F001H 61441 The license key of the application to be used in the PLC CPU used is not authenticated.

Certify the license key of the application to be used.

F002H 61442 A value outside the range is set for the start I/O number.

Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

F003H 61443 The module set in the start I/O number setting is not the Simple Motion module.

Specify a Simple Motion module.

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec 3D00H 15616 The distance between the touch roll and cutter is a negative value. Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

3D01H 15617 The detection sensor installation angle is outside the range of 0 to 360.

3D02H 15618 The roll diameter is 0 or smaller.

3D03H 15619 The detection sensor distance is outside the range of 1 to 5000.

3D04H 15620 The detection sensor installation angle is outside the range of 1 to 179.

3D05H 15621 The roll edge detection angle is outside the range of 1 to 179.

3D06H 15622 A value outside the range is set for the start IO number.

3E20H 15904 The inverter velocity command (velocity limit) cannot be written. Change the program so that CCIEFINVSpdIF (CC- Link IE Field inverter speed control interface) and CCIEFINVTrqIF (CC-Link IE Field inverter torque interface) are not executed simultaneously for the same station.

3E21H 15905 The inverter torque command cannot be written. Change the program so that multiple CCIEFINVTrqIF (CC-Link IE Field inverter torque interfaces) are not executed simultaneously for the same station.

3E22H 15906 The inverter velocity command (velocity limit) is outside the range. Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

3E23H 15907 The inverter torque command is outside the range.

2 APPX Appendix 1 List of Error Codes

A

Application program control FB: Error When an error has occurred, the FB stops its operation.

ErrID Description Corrective action

Hex Dec 3DF0H 15856 A cam data operation warning has occurred at the cam operation

request. Check the "[Md.24] Axis warning No." of the axis 1 to check the warning details and eliminate the cause of the error. After that, execute the FB again.

3F00H 16128 The inverter PLG option specification is outside the range of 1 and 2. Review the setting value and execute the FB again.

3F01H 16129 An inverter write mode error has occurred. Set the inverter operation mode to NET operation mode and execute the FB again.

3F02H 16130 The inverter is not ready. Refer to the following and set the inverter operation mode to "Remote station Ready". After that, execute the FB again. FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)

3F03H 16131 A data link error has occurred. Check that the slave station is connected to the network and execute the FB again.

3FFFH 16383 An inverter error of the target station number has occurred. Check the inverter error details of the target station and eliminate the cause of the error. After that, execute the FB again.

APPX Appendix 1 List of Error Codes 293

29

Appendix 2 List of GOT Devices to be Used Some devices set as switches and lamps in screens may also be set in the common settings including scripts. When these devices need to be changed in a batch, using [Batch Edit] is recommended. For the details of [Batch Edit], refer to "GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help".

Type Device number Use Bit GB40 Always ON

Bit GB30000 Pattern save switch, script trigger

Bit GB30001 Pattern load switch, script trigger

Bit GB30002 Pattern deletion switch, script trigger

Bit GB30004 Pattern scroll up switch, script trigger

Bit GB30005 Pattern scroll down switch, script trigger

Bit GB30006 Display condition of pattern scroll down switch

Bit GB30007 Pattern selection switch, script trigger

Bit GB30008 Display condition of pattern scroll up switch

Bit GB30010 to GB300014 Pattern selection switch

Bit GB30020 Pattern save flag

Bit GB30030 Pattern save confirmation switch, script trigger

Bit GB30031 Pattern deletion confirmation switch, script trigger

Bit GD30031.b13 System signal 1-1: GOT error reset signal

Bit GD32000.b0 Recipe common write trigger signal

Bit GD32000.b1 Recipe common read trigger signal

Bit GD32003.b0 Recipe common writing signal

Bit GD32003.b1 Recipe common reading signal

Bit GS251.b0 Drive accessible notification

Bit GS512.b0 Time change information

Word GD30000 Base screen switching device

Word GD30001 Overlap window screen 1 switching device

Word GD30004 Overlap window screen 2 switching device

Word GD30018 Dialog window screen switching device

Word GD30031 System signal 1-1

Word GD30041 System signal 2-1

Word GD30060 to GD30065 Date and time adjustment switch

Word GD30100 to GD30123 Scale of historical trend graph

Word GD30200 to GD30203 For calculation in the script for tension graph adjustment

Word GD30210 to GD30213 For calculation in the script for rewinder/unwinder graph adjustment

Word GD30220 to GD30223 For calculation in the script for dancer position adjustment

Word GD30300 to GD30309 Graph information of historical trend graph

Word GD30400 to GD30411 Cursor position time, display start position time, display end position time

Word GD31000 to GD31199 Devices for storing the list of pattern files (with extension)

Word GD31200 to GD31205 Devices for storing pattern names of the Pattern Select/Register window screen

Word GD31250 to GD31255 Devices for storing pattern names of the base screen

Word GD31300 Pattern file name offset device

Word GD31301 Current page number

Word GD31302 Maximum number of pages

Word GD31303 Selected recipe number

Word GD31320 to GD31324 Pattern number

Word GD31330 Pattern number offset

Word GD31350 to GD31356 Devices for storing corresponding pattern file names

Word GD31600 to GD31799 Devices for storing the list of pattern files (without extension)

Word GD31900 Devices for storing the comment number

Word GD32000 to GD32005 Recipe common setting

Word GD32100 to GD32102 For calculation of the part display in the B-30100 screen

4 APPX Appendix 2 List of GOT Devices to be Used

A

Word GS513 to GS516 Time after change

Word GS650 to GS652 Current time

Word TMP800 to TMP806 TMP810 to TMP816 TMP950 to TMP996

For calculation in the script

Type Device number Use

APPX Appendix 2 List of GOT Devices to be Used 295

296 APPX Appendix 3 Functional Restrictions by Version

Appendix 3 Functional Restrictions by Version Available functions depend on the version of the application package. The following table shows combinations of each version and function.

*1 Change the structure used in the friction table from XY_TABLE_REF to FRIC_TABLE_REF after changing the FB.

*2 When updating a project of version 1.010L or earlier to 1.011M or later, replace the project. For details, refer to the following. Page 38 Updating Library Elements

Function Version Reference FB Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method) Version 1.001B

or later Page 53 Details of the FB Library

Edge position control

Web break detection

In velocity output with line velocity generator

Version display of FBs in registered libraries on the Element Selection window

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal Page 297 Using MELSOFT iQ AppPortal

Reel change function Version 1.003D or later

Page 163 Reel Change

FB Ramp generator Page 53 Details of the FB Library

Cam generation for flat roll function Cam generation for flat roll (Measurement method) Cam generation for flat roll (Calculation method) Program examples and screen examples have been added.

Version 1.004E or later

Page 53 Details of the FB Library Page 256 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLE (FLAT ROLL) Page 275 APPLICATION SCREEN EXAMPLES (FLAT ROLL)

FB Tension sensor feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis) Page 53 Details of the FB Library

Dancer feedback velocity control (Intermediate axis)

Application program example with an inverter (CC-Link IE Field Network) Page 196 Inverter

The standard Simple Motion module can be used by registering a license key. Page 30 Registering a License Key

FB For the moving average filter, 0 can be set as the time constant. Version 1.006G or later

Page 53 Details of the FB Library

For the line velocity generator, a negative speed can be set.

Converting simulator Page 280 CONVERTING SIMULATOR

FB Change the structure used in the friction torque table of the following FBs from XY_TABLE_REF (2000 2 points) to FRIC_TABLE_REF (50 2 points) that is the friction torque dedicated structure.*1

Friction compensation torque calculation Friction torque measurement

Version 1.007H or later

Page 53 Details of the FB Library

A temporary license is available before a license key is obtained. Version 1.008J or later

Page 30 Registering a License Key

FB Tension sensorless velocity control Inertia estimation Inertia compensation torque calculation (Inertia estimation value) Tension deviation measurement Table interpolation (50 points)

Version 1.010L or later

Page 53 Details of the FB Library

The data type of the AXIS_REF structure member (label) is changed.*2 Version 1.011M or later

Page 53 Details of the FB Library

RD78G4, RD78G8, and RD78G16 that operate in the Simple Motion mode are available. Version 1.012M or later

Change XY_TABLE_REF used in the friction table to FRIC_TABLE_REF.

APPX Appendix 4 Using MELSOFT iQ AppPortal 297

A

Appendix 4 Using MELSOFT iQ AppPortal MELSOFT iQ AppPortal, an application integrated management tool, is useful for managing projects and related files by application package. This tool can be downloaded for free from Mitsubishi Electric FA site. By using the installer (setup.exe) in the MELSOFT iQ AppPortal/iQAP_Data folder in the DVD-ROM supplied with this application package, users can install data of iQ Monozukuri CONVERTING. (Install MELSOFT iQ AppPortal in advance.)

Users cannot make changes to iQ Monozukuri Folder. Copy iQ Monozukuri Folder to the object list area and build an application.

iQ Monozukuri Folder

Copy

Object list area

29

Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration When using this application package before getting a license key, register a temporary license by following the steps below. The temporary license is valid for two months (from the registration date of the temporary license to the same day in the month after next).

*1 If the same day does not exist in the month after next, it is valid until the last day of the month.

Items to be prepared

Clock setting of the PLC CPU module Set the clock data (the current date and time) on "Clock Setting" of GX Works3. For the clock setting, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual

Executing the program 1. Executing the temporary license registration program Copy the license key registration project (AP20-CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite.gx3) in the supplied DVD to a folder on the personal computer, then open the file. The project is created for the R16CPU. When using a model other than R16CPU, change the model. * When registering a license key to multiple PLC CPU modules, register it one by one.

2. Writing and executing the program Write the program to the PLC CPU module and execute it. Select "Online" "Write to PLC" from the menu and write all the program to the PLC CPU module. Set the PLC CPU module to the RUN state and execute the scan program. Select "Program" "Scan" in the Navigation

window and open the registered program. (Program name: LicenseWrite) The scan program includes the function block (FormatLicense) for formatting the license key registration area, the function block (CNV_LicenseWrite) for writing the license key, and the function block (CNV_TempLicenseWrite) for writing the temporary license.

When registering the temporary license to the PLC CPU module for the first time, format the license key registration area. Format it before registering the license key.

When another license of iQ Monozukuri has been registered, register the license without formatting it.

Item Description License key registration project (AP20-CNV002AA_R16_LicWrite.gx3)

A project for registering a license key to the PLC CPU module. It is included in the supplied DVD. FormatLicense (Macro type) CNV_TempLicenseWrite (Macro type)

Registration date 1/1/2018 20/6/2018 31/7/2018 31/12/2018 31/12/2019

Invalid Valid Invalid

Day before the expiration date 1/3/2018

20/8/2018 30/9/2018

29/2/2020 (Leap year) 28/2/2019

*1

*1

*1

0:00 0:00 0:00

8 APPX Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration

A

Registering the temporary license Turn on the execution flag (WriteTempLicense) of the function block (CNV_TempLicenseWrite) in the scan program. Normal completion (o_bOK) or Error completion (o_bError) becomes TRUE. At the error completion, refer to Troubleshooting. (Page 299 Troubleshooting) When Normal operation (o_bOK) turns on, the license key registration is completed. Turn off the execution flag (WriteTempLicense).

3. Deleting the program After the temporary license registration has been completed, delete the program in the PLC CPU module. Select "Online" "Delete PLC Data" from the menu and select the [Select All] button in the "Online Data Operation" window to delete the program.

Troubleshooting The following table lists errors that occur during the temporary license registration and corrective actions.

Error details Cause Corrective action After "CNV_TempLicenseWrite" is executed, Error completion (o_bError) turns on and Normal completion (o_bOK) remains off.

The license key registration area has never been formatted.

The license key outside the range of the memory was about to be written.

Format the license key registration area by using "FormatLicense" and register the temporary license by using "CNV_TempLicenseWrite". Using "FormatLicense" deletes other registered license keys. Register them again.

The temporary license of the same product has already been registered.

Continue to use the temporary license. Get a license and register the license key by using "CNV_LicenseWrite".

After "CNV_TempLicenseWrite" is executed, neither Normal completion (o_bOK) nor Error completion (o_bError) turns on.

The PLC CPU module is not in the RUN state.

"Macro type" is not specified for "FB type" of the license key registration FB.

Set the PLC CPU module to the RUN state. Specify "Macro type" for "FB type" of the license key registration FB.

Click.

Click.

APPX Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration 299

30

Precautions The temporary license is written to the device data storage file, and thus retained after power off. If the license key registration area of the device data storage file is operated with SLMP or the FTP server function, license

information may be lost. For the license key registration FB, set "FB type" to "Macro type".

0 APPX Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration

A

MEMO

APPX Appendix 5 Temporary License Registration 301

302

INSTRUCTION INDEX

C CalcTouchRollCutterAngle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 CCIEFINVSpdIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 CCIEFINVTrqIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 CNV_DiaCalcFeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 CNV_DiaCalcThickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 CNV_DiaCalcVelocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 CNV_DrawCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 CNV_EdgePositionCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 CNV_FeedDancerVelocityCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 CNV_FeedTensionVelocityCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CNV_FlatWindingCamCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 CNV_FlatWindingCamMeasurement. . . . . . . . . 124 CNV_FrictionTorqueMeasurement . . . . . . . . . . 101 CNV_InertiaCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 CNV_InertiaEstimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 CNV_InertiaTorqueCalc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 CNV_LineVelocityGenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 CNV_PIDControl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 CNV_TaperTension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CNV_TensionDeviationMeasurement . . . . . . . . 104 CNV_TensionSensorlessVelocityCtrl. . . . . . . . . . 66 CNV_WebBreakDetect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 CNV_WinderDancerVelocityCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 CNV_WinderFrictionTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 CNV_WinderGainChange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 CNV_WinderInertiaRatioTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 CNV_WinderInertiaTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 CNV_WinderTensionSensorlessCtrl . . . . . . . . . . 63 CNV_WinderTensionTorqueCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 CNV_WinderTensionVelocityCtrl . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

D DiaCalcTurretAngle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

R ReadCamData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

S STD_AverageValueFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 STD_Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 STD_Lowpass1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 STD_RampGenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 STD_Table50Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 STD_TableInterpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

I

303

MEMO

304

REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

2015 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Revision date *Manual number Description October 2015 BCN-B62005-740-A First edition

April 2016 BCN-B62005-740-B Added models AP20-CNV015AA-M0 Added functions CC-Link IE Field Network products have been supported, FBs (Roll diameter calculation (feeding length method), Edge position control, Web break detection) have been added, and MELSOFT iQ AppPortal has been supported. Added or modified parts RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, Chapter 6, Section 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, Appendix 1, 2, 3

October 2016 BCN-B62005-740-C Added functions Reel change function and an FB (Ramp generator) have been added. Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 1.6, 2.1, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13, 5.14, 5.15, 5.16, 5.17, 5.18, 5.19, 5.20, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, Appendix 2

June 2017 BCN-B62005-740-D Added functions The standard Simple Motion module can be used by registering a license key, FBs have been added (Cam generation for flat roll, tension sensor feedback velocity control for intermediate axis, dancer feedback velocity control for intermediate axis), Program examples have been added (Inverter CC- Link IE Field connection, flat roll) Added or modified parts TERMS, REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY, Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1, Chapter 4, Section 4.1, 4.2, Chapter 5, Section 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13, 5.14, 5.15, 5.16, 5.17, 5.18, 5.19, 5.20, 5.21, 6.1, 6.4, Chapter 7, 8, Appendix 1, 3, WARRANTY, TRADEMARKS

June 2018 BCN-B62005-740-E Added functions Converting simulator and FB functions (For the moving average filter, 0 can be set as the time constant, and for the line velocity generator, a negative speed can be set.) Added or modified parts TERMS, REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY, Section 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 4.1, 4.2, Chapter 5, Section 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, Chapter 9, Appendix 1, 3, 4

July 2018 BCN-B62005-740-F Changed functions FB functions have been changed. (The structure size of the friction torque table used in the friction compensation torque calculation and friction torque measurement is changed from 2000 points to 50 points.) Added or modified parts Section 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 9.1, Appendix 1, 2, 3

October 2018 BCN-B62005-740-G Added functions A temporary license is available before a license key is obtained. Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 2.1, 2.4, 4.1, Appendix 3, 5

February 2019 BCN-B62005-740-H Added or modified parts Section 2.1, 4.1, 4.2

July 2019 BCN-B62005-740-J Added functions FB functions have been added. (Tension sensorless velocity control, inertia estimation, inertia compensation torque calculation (inertia estimation value, tension deviation measurement, table interpolation (50 points))) Added or modified parts Section 1.6, 4.1, 4.2, Appendix 1, 3

September 2019 BCN-B62005-740-K Added or modified parts Section 1.6, 2.3, 2.5, 4.1, 4.2, 5.3, 5.5, 7.6, 7.7, 9.1, Appendix 1, 3

September 2021 BCN-B62005-740-L Added functions RD78 simple motion mode has been supported. Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 1.5, 1.6, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, Chapter 5, Section 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 7.1, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, Appendix 3

This manual confers no industrial property rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

305

WARRANTY Please check the following product warranty details before using this product. (1) Software included in this product Check "END-USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT" (BCN-EP2005-0001) included in this product. (2) Hardware included as a system component of this system Check the product warranty details of each hardware.

306

TRADEMARKS Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

BCN-B62005-740-L(2109)

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the AP20-CNV002AA-ME Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi AP20-CNV002AA-ME Converting Instruction Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.